HVAC Complete Specifications

COLORADO SPRINGS,
SPRINGS, COLORADO
HVAC UPGRADES
MULTIPLE SITES
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
650 First Street

Colorado Springs CO 80907
(719) 635635-0900
www.farriswww.farris-usa.com
FEI NO. 1160

11605
6055
FEBRUARY 2012
2012
TABLE OF CONTENTS
COLORADO SPRINGS SCHOOL DISTRICT 2
HVAC UPGRADES
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 70 00
01 73 10
01 73 20
01 74 19
01 77 00
01 78 10
01 78 20
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
CUTTING AND PATCHING
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
22 00 10
22 05 09
22 05 13
22 05 19
22 05 23
22 05 29
22 05 53
22 07 19
22 11 16
22 11 19
22 11 23
22 35 00
GENERAL PLUMBING
BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
DIVISION 23 HVAC
23 00 10
23 05 09
23 05 13
23 05 18
23 05 19
23 05 23
23 05 29
23 05 53
23 05 93
23 07 16
23 07 19
23 11 23
23 21 13
23 21 23
23 23 00
23 51 00
23 52 16
23 62 13
23 82 16
GENERAL HVAC
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
HYDRONIC PIPING
HYDRONIC PUMPS
REFRIGERANT PIPING
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
CONDENSING BOILERS
PACKAGED AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
AIR COILS
D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

(116055)
Table of Contents
TOC - 1
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
26 00 10
26 05 19
26 05 26
26 05 29
26 05 33
26 05 34
26 05 53
26 24 13
26 24 16
26 28 13
26 28 16
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
WIRING DEVICES
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SWITCHBOARDS
PANELBOARDS
FUSES
ENCLOSED SWITCHES

(116055)
Table of Contents
TOC - 2
SECTION 01 70 00
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Construction layout.
General installation of products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
B.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or

Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems
are to be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
B.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.

(116055)
Execution Requirements
01 70 00 - 1
C.
3.3
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Engineer. Include a
detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
3.4
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Engineer promptly.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
H.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.5
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

(116055)
01 70 00 - 2
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.

Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from
damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Burying waste materials on-site will not be permitted.

materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures:
Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.6
Washing waste
STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturers Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section Quality Requirements.
3.7
Remove
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturers written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

(116055)
01 70 00 - 3
3.8
CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section Cutting and Patching.
1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION

(116055)
01 70 00 - 4
SECTION 01 73 10
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

SUBMITTALS
A.
Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days
before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include
the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's
appearance and other significant visual elements.
Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List
utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate
how long service will be disrupted.
Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
Engineer's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C.
Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity
to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
D.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Engineer's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a
visually unsatisfactory manner.

(116055)
Cutting and Patching

01 73 10 - 1
1.4
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to
void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1.
2.
3.2
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,

including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
3.3
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.

(116055)

01 73 10 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of
patching and refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
END OF SECTION

(116055)

01 73 10 - 3
SECTION 01 73 20
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:

1.
2.
1.2
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
1.
Before demolition, Owner will move school property out of construction area. Coordinate
with District Project Manager for additional school property that must be moved after start
of construction.
B.
Notify Engineer of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
C.
Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively

demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use.
Examine report to be aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1.
D.
1.4
Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials

except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.

WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.

(116055)
Selective Demolition
01 73 20 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
B.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
C.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Engineer.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
3.3
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:

1.
2.
3.
C.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Clean salvaged items.

Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until pick up by Owner.
Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:

1.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
equipment to match new equipment.

(116055)
Paint
01 73 20 - 2
2.
3.
4.
D.
3.4
3.5
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Engineer, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled,
or otherwise indicated to remain Owners property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose or them in an EPA approved landfill.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
CLEANING
1.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by selective
demolitions operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations begin.
END OF SECTION

(116055)
01 73 20 - 3
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
1.2
Disposing of non-hazardous construction waste.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:

program.
Certified by EPA-approved certification
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1.
3.2
Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE

(116055)
Construction Waste Management And Disposal

01 74 19 - 1
A.
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION

(116055)
Construction Waste Management And Disposal

01 74 19 - 2
SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Inspection procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Advise Owner, through DPM, of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property
surveys, and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner, through DPM. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where
applicable.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owners DPM. Advise
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, DPM will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
DPM will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify
Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by DPM, that must
be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

(116055)
Closeout Procedures
01 77 00 - 1
1.3
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
DPM will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of
construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
1.4
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment

Procedures."
Submit certified copy of DPM's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by DPM and Architect. The
certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise
resolved for acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A.
Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order.

Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.5
Project name.
Date.
Name of Owner
Name of Architect
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of DPM for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.

(116055)
Closeout Procedures
01 77 00 - 2
1.
2.
3.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.

(116055)
Closeout Procedures
01 77 00 - 3
j.
k.
l.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1)
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
C.
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and

similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION

(116055)
Closeout Procedures
01 77 00 - 4
SECTION 01 78 10
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1.
Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit three copies of each Product Data submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
1.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

(116055)
Project Record Documents

01 78 10 - 1
2.2
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary
to provide a record of selections made.
Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
END OF SECTION

(116055)
Project Record Documents

01 78 10 - 2
SECTION 01 78 20
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Emergency manuals.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of systems and equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection.
Engineer will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
1.
Correct or modify each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit 3 copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer's comments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUALS, GENERAL
A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.
B.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Subject matter included in manual.

Name and address of Project.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
Name and address of Engineer.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
D.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with
clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside
covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

(116055)
Operation and Maintenance Data

01 78 20 - 1
a.
2.
3.
4.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
b.
2.2
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating
procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Product name and model number.

Manufacturer's name.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C.
Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal
shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and
required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E.
Piped Systems:
identification.
2.3
Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

(116055)

01 78 20 - 2
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product name and model number.

Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection

procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and
maintenance, and repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
2.4
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance
service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of
parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of
equipment:
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide,

disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions that detail essential maintenance
procedures:
E.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

(116055)

01 78 20 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
B.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
D.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings
to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
F.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION

(116055)

01 78 20 - 4
SECTION 22 00 10
GENERAL PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Bidding Requirements, Conditions of Contract, General Specifications and General

Requirements, and this Section shall be binding on Contractor and shall apply to all work to be
completed under this Division.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for work from date of his contract until its acceptance by Owner,
and must make good all damages sustained from whatever cause. Contractor shall use proper
care and diligence in bracing and securing all parts of work and shall in all cases judge as to
amount of protection required.
1.2
ORDINANCES, LAWS AND CODES

A.
All work shall conform to rules and regulations of adopted building codes, National Electrical
Code, Local Codes, "Occupational Safety and Health Act", and Local Fire Marshall's Office. All
certificates of approval shall be delivered to Engineer before final payment will be made.
B.
Should any change in Drawings and/or Specifications be required to conform to above

mentioned laws and ordinances, Engineer shall be notified by Bidder prior to bid date, that
necessary changes may be completed. After bid date, all work necessary to meet requirements
shall be at Contractor's expense, with no additional cost to Owner.
C.
Contractor shall pay for all fees, permits, taxes, inspections, connections, etc., associated with
work under this contract. Any costs, charges, or connection fees which Utility Company
assesses Owner or Contractor in order to obtain water, gas, sanitary sewer, or storm sewer to
project facility will be paid by Contractor as part of this contract.
1.3
DATA AND MEASUREMENT

A.
Data given herein and on Drawings is as exact as could be secured insofar as building
construction and existing conditions are concerned. Extreme accuracy is not guaranteed.
Drawings and Specifications are intended for assistance of Contractor in achieving end result.
Exact locations, measurements, distance, levels, etc., will be governed by conditions at job site.
B.
Contractor shall verify that size of equipment supplied by selected manufacturers does not
exceed available mounting space.
C.
Engineer reserves right to change location or size of piping, fixtures, or other pieces of
equipment as may be necessary to avoid conflicts. No extra compensation will be allowed for
such changes unless additional cost to Contractor is caused.
D.
It is strongly recommended that bidders attend pre-bid walk-through that they may have
knowledge of conditions at job site and adapt their bids and work to such conditions.
1.4
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A.
Anything mentioned in this Specification and not shown on Drawings, or vice versa, shall be of
like effect, as shown or mentioned in both. In any case of discrepancy or differences in figures,
Drawings or Specifications, Bidder shall promptly report such discrepancies to Engineer who
shall make a decision in writing. Any adjustment by Contractor without this decision shall be at
expense of Contractor.

(116055)
General Plumbing
22 00 10 - 1
1.5
QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP
A.
Contractor shall give his personal superintendence and direction to work. Contractor shall also
keep a competent foreman or superintendent on project.
B.
All equipment and valves shall be located for ready access, operation, repair, or maintenance.
C.
Any additional drawings necessary for prosecution of work will be furnished by Engineer as
promptly as possible. Contractor shall request any additional instructions needed and shall do
no work without drawings and instructions.
D.
Any discrepancies between plumbing and any other drawings shall be reported to Engineer
prior to Bid Date.
1.6
GUARANTEE
A.
This Contractor shall guarantee all materials, workmanship and successful operation of all
apparatus furnished and installed by him for a period of one years from date of final acceptance
of whole work, and shall guarantee to repair or replace at his own expense any part of
apparatus which may show defect during that time, provided such defect is, in opinion of
Engineer, due to imperfect material or workmanship and not to carelessness or improper
operation. Guarantee period for replacement shall begin with date of replacement.
B.
Owner shall notify Contractor of any failure of any part or parts, which occur during guarantee
period.
C.
Contractor shall also guarantee systems and apparatus to be working properly to meet all
conditions as specified.
1.7
EQUAL MANUFACTURERS/EQUIPMENT
A.
Any approval requests for manufacturer/equipment to be considered as equal other than as

explicitly specified herein and on Drawings shall be submitted to Engineer not less than 10 days
prior to bid date.
B.
Requests for review shall be sufficiently complete to permit evaluation and comparison with
specified equipment and material. Contractor shall provide a comparison checklist, which
clearly identifies any/all deviations from specified products.
C.
Requests for substitutions shall be accompanied by a written comparison between specified

item and substituted item. Request submittals shall be accompanied by complete technical
data, including laboratory reports, if applicable on the proposed product. Each item proposed
for substitution shall be clearly identified. Explain fully differences, if any, between proposed
product and specified product. Failure to provide above information may result in rejection of
submittal.
D.
Only one (1) request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substitution is
not accepted, provide specified product.
E.
If any time during project it is determined that substituted product has been misrepresented as
equal to specified product, Contractor shall be required to replace product at Contractors
expense. This stipulation applies even if Engineer has provided his/her stamp of approval.
F.
Contractor shall be responsible for and bear any expense of alterations to design and/or
building or its appurtenances resulting from substitution of equipment to that specified in
Contract Documents.

(116055)
General Plumbing
22 00 10 - 2
1.8
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Schedule of values shall be submitted within 30 days after award of contract.
B.
Schedule of values for this Division shall be provided as follows:

1.
2.
1.9
Each separate schedule of values broken down by individual specification sections.

Each individual specification section shall be divided into materials and labor to assist in
evaluating pay requests, especially when some materials are stored on site, but not yet
installed.
SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Review of submittal data is only for general conformance with design concept of project and
general compliance with information given in contract documents. Any action shown is subject
to requirements of Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for: dimensions that
shall be confirmed and correlated at job site; fabrication processes and techniques of
construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; and satisfactory performance
of his work.
B.
Contractor will be limited to one review for each piece of equipment.
C.
Listing of a manufacturer as acceptable does not imply automatic compliance of their products
with contract documents. It is sole responsibility of Contractor to insure that any price
quotations received and submittals made are for equipment/materials and/or systems that meet
or exceed specifications included herein.
D.
Each bidder represents that bid is based on materials and equipment described in Contract
Documents. Direct reference in Specifications or Drawings to any product, materials, fixture,
form or type of construction, by name, make, or catalog number, with or without words or
equivalent or or approved equal, shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and
shall not be construed as limited competition. Contractor in such cases may, at his option, use
any product, material, fixtures, form or type of construction which is deemed, in judgment of
Engineer and expressed in writing, as an equivalent to that named. In order to allow fullest
competition, consistent with Owners interest, Engineer will give consideration, prior to
submission of bid proposals, to requests made in accordance with substitution requirements for
approval of products competitive with and similar to those specified by proprietary name and
model number.
1.10
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings, product data, operation & maintenance manuals, and record drawings shall be
submitted in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions, Division 1, and this
Section. On or before thirty days after award of contract, Contractor shall submit electronic
copies (PDF format) of all fabricated work and equipment to be purchased. Data shall be
sufficiently completed to permit evaluation and comparison with specified equipment and
material.
B.
Shop drawing submittals shall include specially prepared technical data for this project,
including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns,
reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard printed
form for general application to a range of similar projects.
C.
Product data submittals shall include standard printed information on materials, products and
systems; not specially prepared for this project, but with designation of selections from among
available choices for this project clearly identified.
D.
Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of work so that work will
not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals for

(116055)
General Plumbing
22 00 10 - 3
same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination of
Engineer's review with another.
E.
Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, Contractor,

subcontractor, submittal name, specification section, and similar information to distinguish it
from other submittals. Show Contractors (including Division 22 sub-contractors and General
Contractors) executed review and approval marking and provide space for Engineer s "Action"
marking. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals that
are received from sources other than through Contractors office will be returned by Engineer
"without action".
F.
Review of submittals does not release Contractor from further satisfactory operating
responsibilities. Material and equipment shall be approved for final acceptance when
construction is completed and all units and systems have been operated and tested to
satisfaction of Engineer.
Should proposed approved alternate equipment involve
rearrangement of designed equipment, a complete layout of area involved shall be submitted by
Contractor, and shall be approved in writing before installation of any such items of equipment.
Any additional expense involved shall be a Contractor borne expense.
G.
All submittals shall bear Contractors (including Division 22 sub-contractors and General
Contractors) stamp of approval and must be dated.
H.
A notation shall be made on each item submitted as to its specified use, schedule designation,
or description of specific location in work.
I.
No material or equipment shall be purchased, delivered to site, or installed until item has been
properly submitted in writing and reviewed and approved by Engineer.
J.
Submittals shall be made even though item is exactly as specified.
K.
Submittals shall be organized by specification section whenever possible. When submitted

equipment or material is not included in specification section, then submit as part of this section.
L.
Should Contractor fail to comply with any of requirements as stated, Engineer reserves right to
select a full line of materials, appliances, and equipment which shall be final and binding upon
Contractor.
M.
Contractor is urged to carefully review each submittal from his suppliers, subcontractors, and
sub-subcontractors for compliance to minimize review time and potential project delays and
resubmittal review charges. Engineer has in his contract with Owner, one (1) review for each
submittal item. Therefore, Contractor shall agree to pay Engineer to review any and all
resubmittals for this project.
N.
Shop drawings, product data, maintenance data, coordination drawings, reports, etc shall be
submitted for as indicated by the individual specification sections.
1.11
PAYMENTS TO ENGINEER
A.
Equal Manufacturers/Equipment: Contractor shall agree to pay Engineer at a rate of

$100.00/hour to provide design modifications as required due to substitutions. Payment to
Engineer shall be made before final payment is made to Contractor.
B.
Submittals: Resubmittal reviews will be billed at a rate of $100.00/hour and shall be paid before
final payment is made to Contractor.

(116055)
General Plumbing
22 00 10 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COORDINATION
A.
Before installing any work, plumbing contractor shall coordinate work of this Division with all
other contractors on project, with utility company and/or Local Code enforcing agency.
B.
All work of this Division shall be installed in proper sequence and so arranged with other trades
that there will be no delay in proper installation and completion of any part or parts of all other
systems and equipment.
C.
Contractor shall carefully examine Drawings and shall be responsible for proper fitting of
equipment and piping as indicated without major alteration. If alterations are required, a
detailed drawing of proposed departure due to actual field conditions or other causes shall be
submitted to Engineer for approval.
D.
Whenever interferences might occur, before installing any of work in question, plumbing
contractor shall consult with other sub-contractors and shall come to an agreement with them as
to exact location and level of piping, ductwork, conduit, and/or equipment.
E.
All changes in work of plumbing contractor, caused by his neglect to follow these instructions,
shall be made at plumbing contractor's expense.
3.2
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Coordinate hook up of following equipment with contractor required to furnish and install them.
See appropriate sections in General Construction Work specifications for further information.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Electrical Equipment
Cabinetry Equipment
Owner Furnished Equipment
WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING

A.
Inasmuch as work under this contract includes work in and renovating an existing building, it
shall be responsibility of each bidder to fully inform himself of any and all conditions which
influence or are influenced by work contemplated by these Specifications and accompanying
Drawings. Submission of a proposal by any bidder will be construed as an admission by him
that he has examined and is fully familiar with premises and all conditions thereon and adjacent
thereto, and has included in this proposal a proper and adequate amount to cover
rearrangement of old work for proper installation and operation of new and existing equipment
as shown on Drawings specified herein, or as required. Such work shall be accomplished in a
neat and proper manner.
B.
Maintain existing plumbing service to occupied areas of facility, unless otherwise indicated, or
when authorized in writing by Owner. Provide a minimum of seven days notice prior to
interruption.
3.4
STORAGE
A.
Contractor shall provide and be responsible for safe storage of his materials. Storage shall not
interfere with work of others or progress of project in any manner.

(116055)
General Plumbing
22 00 10 - 5
3.5
PROTECTION OF NEW AND EXISTING CONSTRUCTION

A.
3.6
Contractor shall apply necessary protective coverage for new and existing fixtures and
equipment and other building construction to prevent damage, scratches, and mars to such
equipment and other building construction as a result of falling objects or work of other trades.
HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A.
3.7
Plumbing contractor is responsible for providing and/or coordinating locations with General
Contractor for concrete housekeeping pads for all floor-mounted mechanical equipment. See
Division 22 Section Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods for additional requirements for
concrete bases.
CLEANING
A.
Contractor shall at all times keep premises free of all waste or surplus materials, rubbish, and
debris which is caused by his employees or results from his work.
B.
After all piping, fixtures, materials, and equipment have been installed and building is ready for
occupancy, Contractor shall remove all stickers, rust stains, labels, temporary covers, plaster
marks, paint spots, etc. All foreign matter shall be flushed out of all piping, plumbing fixtures,
equipment, etc.
C.
Identification plates and trims on all equipment shall be free of paint and shall be polished.
D.
Contractor shall leave plumbing portion of work in a safe, clean, and very neat condition ready
for operation.
3.8
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Contractor shall maintain an up-to-date set of Drawings and Specifications on job site.
Contractor shall annotate all field changes, addenda, change orders, etc. on this set.
B.
Record drawings shall include as-built conditions such as actual make and model of plumbing
fixtures installed.
3.9
INSTRUCTION IN OPERATION BOOKS AND SPARE PARTS LISTS

A.
3.10
A.
Contractor shall furnish Owner with three sets of operating instructions, maintenance
instructions, and spare parts lists of all equipment furnished under this contract indexed and
thumb-tabbed. Lists shall include current unit prices and source of supply for each item of
operable equipment.
OWNER TRAINING
After all tests and adjustments have been made, Contractor shall furnish necessary qualified
personnel to place plumbing systems in normal operation, during which time he shall provide
complete operating and maintenance instructions to Owner's representative with an outline of
instructions in written form. Contractors personnel shall reserve adequate time to instruct
Owner's representative on proper operation (including all phases of system and each of its
component parts) in accordance with Division 1.
END OF SECTION 22 00 10

(116055)
General Plumbing
22 00 10 - 6
SECTION 22 05 09
BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

Dielectric fittings.
Plumbing demolition.
Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each dielectric fitting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.

(116055)
Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods for Plumbing

22 05 09 - 1
C.
2.3
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F
(107 deg C).
D.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225
deg F (107 deg C).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLUMBING DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division 1 for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Existing piping may be reused only where explicitly indicated in Contract Documents.
C.
Piping may not be abandoned in place in unfinished and accessible areas. Piping may be
abandoned in place when concealed in walls, floors and/or above hard ceilings.
D.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to
be removed.
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.2
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,

remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity
and quality.
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on
Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping, unless specifically indicated otherwise, at right angles or parallel (level and plumb)
to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

(116055)

22 05 09 - 2
E.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
G.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
K.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
L.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Division 22 Sections of these Specifications for

roughing-in requirements.
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.
Join pipe and fittings according to following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to tube end. Construct joints
according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy
complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
3.4
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections according to following, unless otherwise indicated:

1.
2.
3.5
Install unions, in piping adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of
equipment.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric couplings and dielectric nipples to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
indicated.

(116055)

22 05 09 - 3
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.

Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6
CONCRETE BASES
A.
3.7
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) high
and 4 inches (100 mm) larger in all directions than supported equipment. All corners shall have
chamfered edges. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
plain-steel welded wire fabric reinforcement.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Contractor shall include in bid cost to disconnect up to 2 joints in each system to enable
Engineer to verify proper joint preparation. If Engineer determines that ends of sampled pipe
were not properly reamed and/or burrs were not removed, then Contractor shall remove all
installed piping in system and shall reinstall piping as specified.

(116055)

22 05 09 - 4
SECTION 22 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed motors.
B.
See individual Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements
for motor-driven equipment.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:

1.
2.
2.2
Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another

Section.
Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics,
other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase.
B.
Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase.
C.
Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
D.
Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which
motor is connected.
E.
Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
F.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F (40 deg C) and at altitude of 6200
feet above sea level.
G.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
H.
Enclosure: Open dripproof.

(116055)
Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment

22 05 13 - 1
2.3
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: According to NEMA Premium nominal efficiencies of induction motors rated 600
volts or less.
C.
Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.
TM
1.
Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.
D.
Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
F.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Code Letter Designation: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
2.4
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Type: One of following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:
1.
2.
3.
Permanent-split capacitor.
Split-phase start, capacitor run.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
C.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
D.
Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor
shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
E.
Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors:

according to NEMA MG 1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform following tests on each motor
Measure winding resistance.

Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
Perform high-potential test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

(116055)
Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment

22 05 13 - 2
SECTION 22 05 19
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following meters and gages for mechanical systems:
1.
2.
1.2
Thermometers.
Pressure gages.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
THERMOMETERS
A.
Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Case: Aluminum, 9 inches (229 mm) long.

Tube: Red, green, or blue reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
Window: Glass or plastic.
Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal
plane, with locking device.
Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum
of 1.5 percent of range.
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
Direct-Mounting,
ASME B40.100.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Dial-Type
Pressure
Gages:
Indicating-dial
type
complying
with
Case: Liquid-filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) diameter.
Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN 8), bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type
is indicated.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
Ring: Stainless steel.
Accuracy: Grade 1A, plus or minus 1 percent of full scale.
Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.

(116055)
Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping

22 05 19 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A.
Install thermometers in the following locations and where shown on Drawings:

1.
2.
B.
Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:

1.
2.
3.2
Inlet and outlet of each heat exchanger.

Inlet and outlet of each storage tank.
Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.

Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
GAGE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install pressure gages at inlet and discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
B.
Install single liquid-filled pressure gage across suction and discharge of each pump. Dry-type
pressure gages are not allowed at this location.
3.3
INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B.
Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) into fluid and in
vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C.
Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most readable
position.
D.
Install ball-valve in piping for each pressure gage.
E.
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
F.
Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.
G.
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

(116055)
Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping

22 05 19 - 2
SECTION 22 05 23
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1.
2.
B.
1.2
Bronze ball valves.

Bronze check valves.
See Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;
valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;
dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include
rated capacities; furnished specialties; and accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VALVES, GENERAL
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B.
Bronze Valves: Threaded or soldered ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
D.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Valve Actuators: Lever Handle for quarter-turn valves.
F.
Extended Valve Stems: Furnish for all valves.
G.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

1.
H.
2.2
Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F (454 deg C) for check; below
421 deg F (216 deg C) for ball valves.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

BRONZE BALL VALVES
A.
Bronze Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.

(116055)
General-Duty Valves For Plumbing Piping

22 05 23 - 1
B.
2.3
Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or
TFE seats; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
BRONZE CHECK VALVES
A.
Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
B.
Type 4, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves:

bronze seat.
Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1.
Shutoff Service: Ball valves.
B.
If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher
CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1.
2.
D.
Select valves with the following end connections:

1.
3.2
Ball Valves.
Check Valves.
For Copper Tubing: Solder-joint or threaded ends.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install valves with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance,
and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1.
3.3
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods for basic piping joint
construction.

(116055)

22 05 23 - 2
B.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

(116055)

22 05 23 - 3
SECTION 22 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Pipe hangers and supports.

Metal framing systems.
Hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems, system contents, and test water.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For following:

1.
2.
Pipe hangers and metal framing systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of manufacturers specified.

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
Grinnell Corp.
PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

(116055)
Hangers & Supports for Plumbing Piping & Equipment

22 05 29 - 1
2.3
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A.
Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.
1.
2.
3.
4.

ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
B.
Pipe clamps.
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish.
2.4
HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A.
Description: Engineered, load-bearing foam-insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

1.
Cooper B-Line IPH series, or approved equal.
B.
Insulation Insert Material: Flexible-elastomeric foam-insulation.
C.
Insert Length: At least as long as protection shield.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install following types:
1.
E.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or
insulated stationary pipes.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated
Metal Framing Systems: For support of multiple or single non-insulated or insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 and larger (DN 15 and larger), suspended from structure and
pipes, NPS 2 and smaller (DN 50 and smaller), racked on walls.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

(116055)

22 05 29 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod.
Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install
following types on insulated pipe:
1.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to

prevent crushing insulation, but not less than following:
a.
b.
c.
G.
3.2
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80): 12 inches (300 mm) long and 0.048 in (1.22
mm) thick.
NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (300 mm) long and 0.06 in (1.52 mm) thick.
NPS 5 to NPS 6 (DN 125 to DN 150): 18 inches (450 mm) long and 0.06 in (1.52
mm) thick.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Support piping from top of joists; DO NOT support piping from bottom of joists.
B.
Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
C.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
1.
2.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Hanger Shield Insert Installation: Install in pipe clamp for horizontal insulated piping in lieu of
protection shield at contractors option.
E.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
F.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
G.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
H.
Insulated Piping: Comply with following:

1.
Do not penetrate insulation of horizontal piping. Use protection shield with hanger, strap,
or clamp sized to match OD of insulation.

(116055)

22 05 29 - 3
I.
Install following hangers:

1.
Horizontal Piping Runs: According to following:

a.
b.
J.
Any band (for non-insulated piping only) or clevis hangers previously listed.
Pipe clamps, straps, and hangers hung below metal framing system.
Install hangers with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters; rod
diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch :
1.
Copper tubing:.
a.
b.
c.
NPS 3/4 and smaller: Maximum span, 5 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4-inch .
NPS 1 : Maximum span, 6 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4-inch .
NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch .
K.
Support vertical piping and tubing at floor.
L.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.3
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
3.4
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
PAINTING
A.
Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

(116055)

22 05 29 - 4
SECTION 22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Equipment nameplates.
Equipment markers.
Pipe markers.
Valve tags.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C.
Equipment marker data and applicable lettering for each equipment marker.
D.
Valve numbering scheme.
E.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies)
to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices
for piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A.
Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on
equipment.
1.
Data:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
B.
Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.

Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
Labels of tested compliances.
Location: Accessible and visible.

Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent

adhesive.

(116055)
Identification for Plumbing Piping & Equipment

22 05 53 - 1
1.
2.
Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.

Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
2.2
Name and plan number.

Equipment service.
Design capacity.
Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (64 by 100 mm).
PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A.
Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe
markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-band or
strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or
as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
C.
Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor
barrier.
D.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers:

back.
E.
Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick with pressuresensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1.
2.
2.3
Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm):
3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) or Larger:
1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum.
VALVE TAGS
A.
Valve Tags: Stamped with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch
numbers, with numbering scheme. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
1.
2.
Material: 0.032-inch- thick brass.

Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

(116055)

22 05 53 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A.
3.2
Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 22 Sections. If more than
single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's
option.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of plumbing
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where
not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the
following general categories of equipment:
1.
2.
B.
Pumps.
Storage Tanks.
Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of plumbing
equipment.
1.
2.
3.
Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm),
and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary
lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.
Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general
categories of equipment:
a.
b.
3.3
Pumps.
Storage Tanks.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow
indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Pretensioned pipe
markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Self-adhesive pipe
markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide,
lapped at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Shaped pipe
markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe
markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)
wide, lapped at least 3 inches (75 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in machine rooms as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Near each valve.

Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures. Where flow pattern is
not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.

(116055)

22 05 53 - 3
4.
3.4
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Install tags on new shut-off valves in piping systems. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
1.
2.
3.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

1-1/2 inches, round.
Valve-Tag Color:
a.
b.
4.
Letter Color:
a.
b.
3.5
Cold Water: Green.

Hot Water: Yellow.
Cold Water: White.

Hot Water: Black.
VALVE SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

A.
3.6
Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in mechanical room.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
other work.
B.
Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.

(116055)

22 05 53 - 4
SECTION 22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes semi-rigid and flexible piping insulation, insulating cements, field-applied
jackets, accessories and attachments, and sealing compounds.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: Thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if
any), for each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed

indices of 25 and 50, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of following:

1.
Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
CertainTeed Manson.
Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
Schuller International, Inc.
PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS

A.
Glass-Fiber Insulation:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Glass-Fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the
Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, maximum thermal
conductivity of 0.27 btu*in./hr.*ft.*F, with factory-applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder
jacket.
Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass
cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation,
and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor
applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
Glass-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
Glass-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement:
Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.

(116055)
Plumbing Piping Insulation

22 07 19 - 1
B.
Field-Applied Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

1.
2.
3.
Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.
Standard PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll
stock.
Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20mil- (0.5-mm-) thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
piping and fittings.
C.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vaporretarder.
E.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
F.
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
G.
Apply glass-fiber blanket insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal
and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Cover insulation at fittings, valves, and specialties with standard PVC fitting covers.
H.
Hangers: Do not penetrate insulation with hangers. Apply insulation continuously through
hangers.
I.
When insulation vapor-retarders are damaged, repair damage with vapor-retarder mastic.
J.
Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor-retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vaporretarder.
K.
Vapor-retarder is required on all insulation where fluid temperature is less than 60 deg F (15
deg C).

(116055)

22 07 19 - 2
3.2
PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Piping System
Temp.
Range
Domestic Hot &

Recirculated Hot
Water
All
Domestic Cold
Water
Piping
Pipe Size
Location
All
Interior
Interior
Insulation
Thickness
Insulation
Material
Field Applied
Jacket
" to
1"
"[1]
Glass-Fiber
none
1" to
4"
Glass-Fiber
none
All
"
Glass-Fiber
none

(116055)

22 07 19 - 3
SECTION 22 11 16
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes domestic water piping from locations indicated to equipment inside
building.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For piping, tubing, fittings, and couplings.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through
9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating
at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wroughtcopper, solder-joint fittings.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
VALVES
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves.
B.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing and drain valves.
2.3
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for
pipe hanger and support devices.

(116055)
Domestic Water Piping

22 11 16 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Above Ground Piping: Use hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and
soldered joints.
3.2
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
3.3
See Division 22 Section General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping for types of valves to be
used.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B.
Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
C.
Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is
full of water.
D.
Perform following steps for new piping before operation:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Close drain valves, hydrants, hose bibs and shut-off valves between existing and new
positions of systems.
Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
Set automatic flow control valves to proper setting.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
E.
Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not
operate water heaters before filling with water.
F.
Energize pumps and verify proper operation.
3.4
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

(116055)

22 11 16 - 2
3.5

A.
3.6
Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment."
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D.
Extend domestic water piping and connect to following:

1.
2.
3.7
Booster Systems: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.

Storage Tanks & Heat Exchangers: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in
sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

A.
Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Test domestic water piping as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.8
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

(116055)

22 11 16 - 3
1.
2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or as described below:
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Fill and isolate system according to either of following:
1)
2)
c.
d.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
(50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm
(200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after standing time.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.9
PROTECTION
A.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

(116055)

22 11 16 - 4
SECTION 22 11 19
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes following plumbing specialties:

1.
2.
3.
1.2
Balancing valves.
Strainers.
Hose-End Drain Valves
A.
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
1.3
Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities and indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required
clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the
following:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Balancing valves.
Strainers.
Hose-End Drain Valves.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping materials
and installation.
C.
NSF Compliance:
1.
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by manufacturers specified.

BALANCING VALVES
A.
Automatic Flow Control Valves: Flow rate shall be factory set and shall automatically limit flow
to within 5% of specified flow rate over at least 95% of control range over system pressure

(116055)
Domestic Water Piping Specialties

22 11 19 - 1
fluctuations. Flow cartridge shall be stainless steel, removable and permanently marked with
flow rate and spring range. Maximum pressure drop throw automatic flow control valve shall not
exceed 7.0 feet w.c. Rated for 400 psig @ 250F.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
C.
2.3
Flow Design, Inc.
Assembly shall consist of bronze Y-type body; integral bronze body ball valve; O-ring type
union; calibrated nameplate; and threaded or solder-joint ends.
STRAINERS
A.
Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. Include
ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch round perforations, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Pressure Rating:
125-psig minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise
indicated.
Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.
a.
2.4
Drain: Hose-end drain valve.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP.
Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable
seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1.
2.
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and chained
cap.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install strainers on supply side of each pump.
C.
Install air vents at piping high points. Include shutoff valve in inlet.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

(116055)
Domestic Water Piping Specialties

22 11 19 - 2
SECTION 22 11 23
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following all-bronze or stainless steel centrifugal pumps for domestic
hot-water circulation:
1.
1.2
In-line circulators.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified. Include certified
performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected
models, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B.
Operation and maintenance data.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2

IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
B.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries.

Grundfos Pumps Corp.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, close-coupled, in-line, sealless

centrifugal pumps as defined in HI 5.1-5.6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge-type unit with

motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor
shaft mounted horizontally.
Casing:
Bronze or stainless steel, with threaded companion-flange or flanged
connections.
Impeller: Corrosion-resistant material.
Motor: Three speed, unless otherwise indicated.

(116055)
Domestic Water Pumps

22 11 23 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with HI 1.4.
B.
Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C.
Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D.
Install continuous-thread hanger rods and of sufficient size to support pump weight. Fabricate
brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 22
Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
E.
Install immersion-type thermostats in piping as required.
F.
G.
Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
H.
Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or
greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
1.
2.
Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve and throttling
valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping. Refer
to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves
for domestic water piping and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
strainers.
Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressuregage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and
discharge piping around pumps. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and gage connectors.
I.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
J.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."
K.
Connect controls to pumps for required control.

(116055)
Domestic Water Pumps

22 11 23 - 2
SECTION 22 35 00
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following for domestic water systems:

1.
2.
3.
1.2
Storage tank.
Brazed plate heat exchangers.
Expansion tanks.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each storage tank, heat exchanger, and expansion tank. Include rated
capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of heat exchangers and storage tanks certifying
that products furnished comply with requirements.
C.
Warranties: Submit copy of warranties listed below.
1.3
WARRANTIES
A.
Provide five year warranty for storage tanks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1.
Storage Tanks:
a.
b.
2.
Brazed Plate Heat Exchangers:

a.
b.
c.
3.
A.O. Smith
Lochinvar
Alfa Laval, Inc.

AIC
Bell & Gossett; ITT Industries.
Expansion Tanks:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Taco, Inc.
Wessels Co.

(116055)
Domestic Water Heaters

22 35 00 - 1
2.2
STORAGE TANKS
A.
Description: ASME rated storage tank.
B.
Storage-Tank-Shell Construction: Steel with alkaline borosilicate fused to tank at 1600F. With
baked enamel, outer jacket and minimum R-12.5 foam insulation. 150-psig working-pressure
rating.
1.
2.
2.3
Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping connections,
relief valve, pressure gage, thermometer, blowdown, vent, anode rods, and controls as
required by Drawings. Attach tappings to tank before testing and labeling. Include
ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium rods for cathodic protection.
BRAZED PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

A.
Description: Assembly of heat-exchanger plates, permanently brazed together, for using

heating hot water to heat domestic water.
B.
Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
C.
Plate Construction: Vented, double wall.
D.
Plate Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel.
E.
Connections: Stainless steel; threaded.
F.
Capacity and Characteristics: As indicated on Drawings.
2.4
EXPANSION TANKS
A.
Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed,
butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.
B.
Construction: 150-psig working-pressure rating.
C.
Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include
ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
D.
Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for
potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
E.
Tank Exterior Finish: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."

(116055)

22 35 00 - 2
3.2
HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A.
Install heat exchangers on wall-mounted metal support, level and plumb, according to layout
drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended
clearances. Arrange so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
B.
Anchor heat exchangers to support.
C.
Install thermometers on heat-exchanger inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Division 22 Section
"Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
3.3
STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION

A.
Install storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original
design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
Arrange so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
B.
Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves
with sensing elements that extend into shells. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in
continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
C.
Install thermometers on heat-exchanger inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Division 22 Section
"Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
D.
Fill storage tanks with water.
E.
Charge expansion tank with air.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers and storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-watercirculating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.
D.
Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.

(116055)

22 35 00 - 3
SECTION 23 00 10
GENERAL HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Bidding Requirements, Conditions of Contract, General Specifications and General

Requirements, and this Section shall be binding on Contractor and shall apply to all work to be
completed under this Division.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for work from date of his contract until its acceptance by Owner,
and must make good all damages sustained from whatever cause. Contractor shall use proper
care and diligence in bracing and securing all parts of work and shall in all cases judge as to
amount of protection required.
1.2

A.
All work shall conform to rules and regulations of adopted building codes, National Electrical
Code, Local Codes, "Occupational Safety and Health Act", and Local Fire Marshall's Office. All
certificates of approval shall be delivered to Engineer before final payment will be made.
B.
Should any change in Drawings and/or Specifications be required to conform to above

mentioned laws and ordinances, Engineer shall be notified by Bidder prior to bid date, that
necessary changes may be completed. After bid date, all work necessary to meet requirements
shall be at Contractor's expense, with no additional cost to Owner.
C.
Contractor shall pay for all fees, permits, taxes, inspections, connections, etc., associated with
work under this contract. Any costs, charges, or connection fees which Utility Company
assesses Owner or Contractor in order to obtain gas to project facility will be paid by Contractor
as part of this contract.
1.3

A.
Data given herein and on Drawings is as exact as could be secured insofar as building
construction and existing conditions are concerned. Extreme accuracy is not guaranteed.
Drawings and Specifications are intended for assistance of Contractor in achieving end result.
Exact locations, measurements, distance, levels, etc., will be governed by conditions at job site.
B.
Contractor shall verify that size of equipment supplied by selected manufacturers does not
exceed available mounting space.
C.
Engineer reserves right to change location or size of piping, ductwork, or other pieces of
equipment as may be necessary to avoid conflicts. No extra compensation will be allowed for
such changes unless additional cost to Contractor is caused.
D.
It is strongly recommended that bidders attend pre-bid walk-thru that they may have knowledge
of conditions at job site and adapt their bids and work to such conditions.
1.4

A.
Anything mentioned in this Specification and not shown on Drawings, or vice versa, shall be of
like effect, as shown or mentioned in both. In any case of discrepancy or differences in figures,
Drawings or Specifications, Bidder shall promptly report such discrepancies to Engineer who
shall make a decision in writing. Any adjustment by Contractor without this decision shall be at
expense of Contractor.

(116055)
General HVAC
23 00 10 - 1
1.5
A.
Contractor shall give his personal superintendence and direction to work. Contractor shall also
keep a competent foreman or superintendent on project.
B.
All equipment, controls, valves, and dampers shall be located for ready access, operation,
repair, or maintenance.
C.
Any additional drawings necessary for prosecution of work will be furnished by Engineer as
promptly as possible. Contractor shall request any additional instructions needed and shall do
no work without drawings and instructions.
D.
Any discrepancies between mechanical, electrical, architectural, or other drawings shall be

reported to Engineer prior to Bid Date.
1.6
GUARANTEE
A.
This Contractor shall guarantee all materials, workmanship and successful operation of all
apparatus furnished and installed by him for a period of one year from date of final acceptance
of whole work, and shall guarantee to repair or replace at his own expense any part of
apparatus which may show defect during that time, provided such defect is, in opinion of
Engineer, due to imperfect material or workmanship and not to carelessness or improper
operation. Guarantee period for replacement shall begin with date of replacement.
B.
Owner shall notify Contractor of any failure of any part or parts, which occur during guarantee
period.
C.
Contractor shall also guarantee systems and apparatus to be working properly to meet all
conditions as specified.
1.7
A.

explicitly specified herein and on Drawings shall be submitted to Engineer not less than 10 days
prior to bid date.
B.
specified equipment and material. Contractor shall provide a comparison checklist, which
clearly identifies any/all deviations from specified products.
C.
Requests for substitutions shall be accompanied by a written comparison between specified

item and substituted item. Request submittals shall be accompanied by complete technical
data, including laboratory reports, if applicable on the proposed product. Each item proposed
for substitution shall be clearly identified. Explain fully differences, if any, between proposed
product and specified product. Failure to provide above information may result in rejection of
submittal.
D.
Only one (1) request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substitution is
not accepted, provide specified product.
E.
If any time during project it is determined that substituted product has been misrepresented as
equal to specified product, Contractor shall be required to replace product at Contractors
expense. This stipulation applies even if Engineer has provided his/her stamp of approval.
F.
Contractor shall be responsible for and bear any expense of alterations to design and/or
building or its appurtenances resulting from substitution of equipment to that specified in
Contract Documents.

(116055)
General HVAC
23 00 10 - 2
1.8
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Schedule of values shall be submitted within 30 days after award of contract or as specified in
Division 1 or General Conditions of contract.
B.
Schedule of values for this Division shall be provided as follows:

1.
2.
1.9
Each separate schedule of values shall be broken down by individual specification

sections.
Each individual specification section shall be divided into materials and labor to assist
Engineer in evaluating pay requests, especially when some materials are stored on site,
but not yet installed.
SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Review of submittal data is only for general conformance with design concept of project and
general compliance with information given in contract documents. Any action shown is subject
to requirements of Drawings and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for: dimensions that
shall be confirmed and correlated at job site; fabrication processes and techniques of
construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades; and satisfactory performance
of his work.
B.
Contractor will be limited to one review for each submittal item.
C.
Listing of a manufacturer as acceptable does not imply automatic compliance of their products
with contract documents. It is sole responsibility of Contractor to insure that any price
quotations received and submittals made are for equipment/materials and/or systems that meet
or exceed specifications included herein.
D.
Each bidder represents that bid is based on materials and equipment described in Contract
Documents. Direct reference in Specifications or Drawings to any product, materials, fixture,
form or type of construction, by name, make, or catalog number, with or without words or
equivalent or or approved equal, shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and
shall not be construed as limited competition. Contractor in such cases may, at his option, use
any product, material, fixtures, form or type of construction which is deemed, in judgment of
Engineer and expressed in writing, as an equivalent to that named. In order to allow fullest
competition, consistent with Owners interest, Engineer will give consideration, prior to
submission of bid proposals, to requests made in accordance with substitution requirements for
approval of products competitive with and similar to those specified by proprietary name and
model number.
1.10
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings, product data, operation & maintenance manuals, and record drawings shall be
submitted in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions, Division 1, and this
Section. On or before thirty days after award of contract, Contractor shall submit electronic
copies (PDF format) of all fabricated work and equipment to be purchased. Data shall be
sufficiently completed to permit evaluation and comparison with specified equipment and
material.
B.
Shop drawing submittals shall include specially prepared technical data for this project,
including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns,
reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard printed
form for general application to a range of similar projects.
C.
Product data submittals shall include standard printed information on materials, products and
systems; not specially prepared for this project, but with designation of selections from among
available choices for this project clearly identified.

(116055)
General HVAC
23 00 10 - 3
D.
Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of work so that work will
not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals for
same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination of
Engineer's review with another.
E.
Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, Contractor,

subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals.
Show Contractors (including Division 23 sub-contractors and General Contractors) executed
review and approval marking and providing space for Engineer's "Action" marking. Package
each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals that are received from
sources other than through Contractors office will be returned by Engineer" without action".
F.
Review of submittals does not release Contractor from further satisfactory operating
responsibilities. Material and equipment shall be approved for final acceptance when
construction is completed and all units and systems have been operated, tested, adjusted and
balanced to satisfaction of Engineer. Should proposed approved alternate equipment involve
rearrangement of designed equipment, a complete layout of area involved shall be submitted by
Contractor, and shall be approved in writing before installation of any such items of equipment.
Any additional expense involved shall be a Contractor borne expense.
G.
All submittals shall bear Contractors (including Division 23 sub-contractors and General
Contractors) stamp of approval and must be dated.
H.
A notation shall be made on each item submitted as to its specified use, schedule designation,
or description of specific location in work.
I.
No material or equipment shall be purchased, delivered to site, or installed until item has been
properly submitted in writing and reviewed and approved by Engineer.
J.
Submittals shall be made even though item is exactly as specified.
K.
Submittals shall be organized by specification section whenever possible. When submitted

equipment or material is not included in specification section, then submit as part of this
Section.
L.
Should Contractor fail to comply with any of requirements as stated, Engineer reserves right to
select a full line of materials, appliances, and equipment which shall be final and binding upon
Contractor.
M.
Contractor is urged to carefully review each submittal from his suppliers, subcontractors, and
sub-subcontractors for compliance to minimize review time and potential project delays]
resubmittal review charges.
N.
Shop drawings, product data, maintenance data, coordination drawings, reports, etc shall be
submitted for as indicated by the individual specification sections.
1.11
PAYMENTS TO ENGINEER
A.
Equal Manufacturers/Equipment: Contractor shall agree to pay Engineer at a rate of

$100.00/hour to provide design modifications as required due to substitutions. Payment to
Engineer shall be made before final payment is made to Contractor.
B.
Submittals: Resubmittal reviews will be billed at a rate of $100.00/hour and shall be paid before
final payment is made to Contractor.

(116055)
General HVAC
23 00 10 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COORDINATION
A.
Before installing any work, mechanical contractor shall coordinate mechanical work with all
other contractors on project, with utility company and/or Local Code enforcing agency.
B.
All mechanical work shall be installed in proper sequence and so arranged with other trades
that there will be no delay in proper installation and completion of any part or parts of all other
systems and equipment.
C.
Contractor shall carefully examine Drawings and shall be responsible for proper fitting of
equipment and piping and/or ductwork as indicated without major alteration. If alterations are
required, a detailed drawing of proposed departure due to actual field conditions or other
causes shall be submitted to Engineer for approval.
D.
Whenever interferences might occur, before installing any of work in question, mechanical
contractor shall consult with other sub-contractors and shall come to an agreement with them as
to exact location and level of piping, ductwork, conduit, and/or equipment.
E.
All changes in work of mechanical contractor, caused by his neglect to follow these instructions,
shall be made at mechanical contractor's expense.
3.2

A.
Inasmuch as work under this contract includes work in and renovating an existing building, it
shall be responsibility of each bidder to fully inform himself of any and all conditions which
influence or are influenced by work contemplated by these Specifications and accompanying
Drawings. Submission of a proposal by any bidder will be construed as an admission by him
that he has examined and is fully familiar with premises and all conditions thereon and adjacent
thereto, and has included in this proposal a proper and adequate amount to cover
rearrangement of old work for proper installation and operation of new and existing equipment
as shown on Drawings specified herein, or as required. Such work shall be accomplished in a
neat and proper manner.
B.
Maintain existing HVAC service to occupied areas of operational facilities, unless otherwise
indicated, or when authorized in writing by Owner. Provide a minimum of seven days notice
prior to interruption.
3.3
STORAGE
A.
3.4
Contractor shall provide and be responsible for safe storage of his materials. Storage shall not
interfere with work of others or progress of project in any manner.
PROTECTION OF NEW AND EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
A.
3.5
Contractor shall apply necessary protective coverage for new and existing fixtures and
equipment and other building construction to prevent damage, scratches, and mars to such
equipment and other building construction as a result of falling objects or work of other trades.
HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A.
Mechanical contractor is responsible for providing and/or coordinating sizes and locations with
General Contractor for concrete housekeeping pads for all floor-mounted HVAC equipment.

(116055)
General HVAC
23 00 10 - 5
See Division 23 Section Basic HVAC Materials and Methods for additional requirements for
concrete bases.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Contractor shall at all times keep premises free of all waste or surplus materials, rubbish, and
debris which is caused by his employees or results from his work.
B.
After all piping, ductwork, and equipment have been installed and building is ready for
occupancy, Contractor shall remove all stickers, rust stains, labels, temporary covers, plaster
marks, paint spots, etc. All foreign matter shall be blown out or flushed out of all piping,
ductwork, equipment, etc.
C.
Identification plates and trims on all equipment shall be free of paint and shall be polished.
D.
Contractor shall leave mechanical portion of work in a safe, clean, and very neat condition
ready for operation.
3.7
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Contractor shall maintain an up-to-date set of Drawings and Specifications on job site.
Contractor shall annotate all field changes, addenda, change orders, etc. on this set and see
that a copy of all changes is furnished to Engineer at end of project for review.
B.
Record drawings shall include as-built conditions such as actual make and model of mechanical
equipment installed.
3.8
INSTRUCTION IN OPERATION BOOKS AND SPARE PARTS LISTS

A.
3.9
Contractor shall furnish Owner with three sets of operating instructions, maintenance
instructions, and spare parts lists of all equipment furnished under this contract indexed and
thumb-tabbed. Lists shall include current unit prices and source of supply for each item of
operable equipment.
OWNER TRAINING
A.
After all tests and adjustments have been made, Contractor shall furnish necessary qualified
personnel to place mechanical systems in normal operation, during which time he shall provide
complete operating and maintenance instructions to Owner's representative with an outline of
instructions in written form. Contractors personnel shall reserve adequate time to instruct
Owner's representative on proper operation (including all phases of system and each of its
component parts).

(116055)
General HVAC
23 00 10 - 6
SECTION 23 05 09
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

Dielectric fittings.
Grout.
HVAC demolition.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
Concrete bases.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each dielectric fitting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

(116055)
Basic HVAC Materials and Methods

23 05 09 - 1
B.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
C.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
2.3
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
D.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.4
GROUT
A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1.
2.
3.
Characteristics:
Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
noncorrosive,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HVAC DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching," and Division 2 Section "Selective
Demolition," for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Existing piping, ductwork, and equipment may be reused only where explicitly indicated in
Contract Documents.
C.
Piping, ductwork, and equipment may not be abandoned in place in unfinished and accessible
areas. Piping may be abandoned in place when concealed in walls, floors and/or above hard
ceilings.
D.
Existing piping, ductwork, and equipment shall be relocated, removed, reconnected or left in
place as indicated on Drawings. Where an existing device is shown relocated, new piping,
ductwork, or other material shall be provided. All equipment and material removed which is
considered salvageable by Owner and is not specifically designated to be reused on Drawings
or not practical to be reused shall remain property of Owner and shall be neatly stockpiled in
specially designated location. All material removed which is not considered salvageable by
Owner or is not specifically designated to be reused on Drawings shall be properly and lawfully
removed from site and disposed of at Contractors expense.
E.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated

(116055)

23 05 09 - 2
to be removed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
3.2
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Abandoning piping above ceiling is not permitted.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,

remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity
and quality.
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
Install piping, unless specifically indicated otherwise, at right angles or parallel (level and plumb)
to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
M.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Division 23 Sections of these Specifications for

roughing-in requirements.
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.

(116055)

23 05 09 - 3
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.4
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric nipples or dielectric flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals. Install shut-off valves upstream of dielectric fittings.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's

(116055)

23 05 09 - 4
written instructions or as indicated.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.7
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches high and 4
inches larger in both directions than supported unit with all corners having chamfered
edges.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and plain-steel welded wire fabric
reinforcement.
Comply with CRSIs Manual of Standard Practice for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
3.8
PAINTING
A.
3.9
Unless indicated elsewhere paint exposed exterior piping, ductwork, equipment, and supports to
match adjacent building trim.
A.
Contractor shall include in bid the cost to disconnect a minimum of two joints in each system
(whichever is greater) to enable Engineer to verify proper joint preparation. If Engineer
determines that ends of sampled pipe were not properly reamed and/or burrs were not
removed, then Contractor shall remove all installed piping in system and shall reinstall piping as
specified.

(116055)

23 05 09 - 5
SECTION 23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed motors.
B.
See individual Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements
for motor-driven equipment.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:

1.
2.
2.2
Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another

Section.
Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics,
other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase.
B.
Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase.
C.
Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
D.
Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which
motor is connected.
E.
Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
F.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 6200 feet above
sea level.
G.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
H.
Enclosure: Open dripproof.

(116055)
Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

23 05 13 - 1
2.3
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: According to NEMA Premium nominal efficiencies of induction motors rated 600
volts or less.
C.
Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.
TM
1.
Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.
D.
Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
F.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Code Letter Designation:

1.
2.
I.
Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 HP and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 HP.
1.
2.4
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
Finish: Gray enamel.
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output.
Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.
Inverter-duty.
Insulation: Class H.
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Type: One of following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:
1.
2.
3.
Permanent-split capacitor.
Split-phase start, capacitor run.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
C.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
D.
Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor
shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.

(116055)

23 05 13 - 2
E.
Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors:

according to NEMA MG 1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform following tests on each motor
Measure winding resistance.

Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
Perform high-potential test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

(116055)

23 05 13 - 3
SECTION 23 05 18
ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Escutcheons.
SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls.
B.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.
1.
3.2
Escutcheons for New Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type.

A.
Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.

(116055)
Escutcheons for HVAC Piping

23 05 18 - 1
SECTION 23 05 19
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following meters and gages for mechanical systems:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Thermometers.
Gages.
Test plugs.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
THERMOMETERS
A.
Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Thermowells:
1.
2.2
Case: Aluminum, 9 inches long.

Tube: Red, green, or blue reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal
plane, with locking device.
Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum
of 1.5 percent of range.
Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
Direct-Mounting,
ASME B40.100.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Dial-Type
Pressure
Gages:
Indicating-dial
type
complying
with
Case: Liquid-filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch diameter.

Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is
indicated.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
Ring: Stainless steel.

(116055)
Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping

23 05 19 - 1
9.
10.
B.
Pressure-Gage Fittings:
1.
2.3
Accuracy: Grade 1A, plus or minus 1 percent of full scale.

Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure, unless otherwise
indicated.
Valves: NPS 1/4 brass ball-valve type.
TEST PLUGS
A.
Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed
and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.
B.
Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
C.
Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.

1.
2.
D.
Insert material for water service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR.

Insert material for water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.
Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gage and adaptor, two thermometers,
and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be
of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- diameter dial and
probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig.
Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter dial
and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25 to 125 deg F.
High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter dial
and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220 deg F.
Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A.
Install thermometers in the following locations and where indicated on Drawings:

1.
2.
B.
Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:

1.
3.2
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler.

Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
Heating Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
GAGE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install single liquid-filled pressure gage across suction and discharge of each pump.
B.
Install pressure gages at other locations indicated on Drawings.
3.3
INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

(116055)

23 05 19 - 2
B.
Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical
position in piping tees where thermometers and temperatures sensors are indicated.
C.
Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
D.
Install test plugs in tees in piping where indicated on Drawings and following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inlet and outlet of pump.

Inlet and outlet of boilers.
Adjacent to each temperature sensor.
Inlet and outlet of heat exchangers.
E.
Test plugs shall be installed with adequate clearance to permit insertion and observation of
instrumentation.
F.
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
G.
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

(116055)

23 05 19 - 3
SECTION 23 05 23
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.2
Bronze ball valves.

Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves.
Bronze check valves.
Ferrous-alloy wafer check valves.
See Division 23 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve
design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions;
and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated
capacities; furnished specialties; and accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
B.
ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
design criteria.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VALVES, GENERAL
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B.
Bronze Valves: NPS 3 and Smaller: Threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Ferrous Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
E.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Valve Actuators:
1.
Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves.
G.
Extended Valve Stems: Furnish for all valves.
H.
Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves.

(116055)
General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping

23 05 23 - 1
I.
2.2
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

BRONZE BALL VALVES
A.
Bronze Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
B.
Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or
TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
C.
Three-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE
or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
2.3
FERROUS-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES

A.
Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and
lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish with position locking
operator for valves used for throttling service.
B.
Flangeless, 175-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one-piece
stem.
C.
Single-Flange, 175-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type with onepiece stem.
D.
Grooved-End, 175-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Ductile-iron or steel body
with grooved or shouldered ends.
2.4
BRONZE CHECK VALVES

A.
Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
B.
Type 1, Class 125, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and
seat.
C.
Type 1, Class 125, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.
D.
Type 3, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat.
2.5
FERROUS-ALLOY WAFER CHECK VALVES

A.
Ferrous-Alloy Wafer Check Valves, General: API 594, spring loaded.
B.
Dual-Plate, Class 125 or 150, Ferrous-Alloy, Wafer-Lug Check Valves: Single-flange body.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1.
2.
3.
Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves.

Throttling Service: Ball or butterfly valves.
Pump Discharge: Wafer or bronze check valves.

(116055)

23 05 23 - 2
B.
If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher
CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Heating Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Select valves, except single-flange types, with the following end connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, copper alloy.

Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3: Three-piece, copper alloy.
Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: With EPDM liner.
Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze.
Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Ferrous alloy.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3: Threaded or flanged ends.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1.
2.
3.3
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

Wafer Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
3.4
Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

(116055)

23 05 23 - 3
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2

Metal framing systems.
Fastener systems.
Equipment supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A.
Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems, system contents, and test water.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
2.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one manufacturers specified.

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.

Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
Grinnell Corp.
PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

(116055)
Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment

23 05 29 - 1
2.3
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.

ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
B.
Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.
C.
Pipe clamps.
D.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish.
2.4
HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A.
Calcium Silicate Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet

metal shield.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
For Metal Framing or Clamped Systems:
Insert and shield shall cover entire
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
Insert Length: At least as long as protection shield; extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal
shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
Foam Insulation Hanger Shield Inserts

1.
Description:
shield.
a.
2.
3.
2.5
Engineered, load-bearing foam-insulation insert encased in sheet metal
Cooper B-Line IPH series, or approved equal.
Insulation Insert Material: Flexible-elastomeric foam-insulation.

Insert Length: At least as long as protection shield.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.6
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from metal framing
systems.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Grout: See Division 23 Section Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.

(116055)

23 05 29 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A.
Specific support requirements are specified in this Section and in Sections specifying
equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hanger shield inserts for insulated piping.
D.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
2.
F.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or
insulated stationary pipes.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated
Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated
or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
Pipe Roller Stands (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Metal Framing Systems: For support of multiple or single non-insulated or insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 and larger, suspended from structure and pipes, NPS 2 and
smaller, racked on walls.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

(116055)

23 05 29 - 3
8.
9.
G.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
Protection Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install following on insulated refrigerant piping:
1.
Protection shields (MSS Type 40): For piping of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation, but not less than following:
a.
b.
c.
NPS to NPS 3: 12 inches long and 0.048 inches thick.

NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inches thick.
NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inches thick.
H.
Hanger Shield Inserts: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, provide hanger shield inserts for supporting insulated piping.
I.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
3.2

A.
Support piping from top of joists or floor above to allow piping movement due to thermal
expansion and contraction; DO NOT support piping from bottom of joists unless specifically
indicated on Drawings.
B.
Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
C.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
1.
2.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
Field-assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Hanger Shield Insert Installation: Install in pipe hanger or clamp for horizontal insulated piping.
E.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
F.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from metal framing systems.
G.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion fittings and
loops.
H.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
I.
Install building attachments attached to structural steel. Install additional attachments at

concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, flexible connectors, and strainers and larger and
at changes in direction of piping.
J.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

(116055)

23 05 29 - 4
K.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
L.
Insulated Piping: Comply with following:

1.
2.
Attach vertical-piping clamps directly to piping.

according to ASME B31.9.
DO NOT penetrate insulation of horizontal piping.
a.
b.
c.
M.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to following:

a.
2.
Pipe clamps, straps, and hangers hung below metal framing system.
Install hangers with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters; rod
diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch :
1.
Steel piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
Copper tubing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.3
Any band or clevis hangers listed previously.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to following:

a.
O.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Use calcium silicate thermalhanger shield insert with hanger, strap, or clamp sized to match OD of insulation or
insert.
Refrigerant Suction Piping: Use foam insulation hanger shield insert with hanger,
strap, or clamp sized to match OD of insulation or insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
Install the following hangers:

1.
N.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits
NPS 3/4 and smaller: Maximum span, 5 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4-inch .
NPS 1 : Maximum span, 6 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/4-inch .
NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet ; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch .
NPS 2-1/2 : Maximum span, 108 inches ; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch .
NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet ; minimum rod size, 1/2-inch .
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

(116055)

23 05 29 - 5
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
PAINTING
A.
Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

(116055)

23 05 29 - 6
SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Equipment nameplates.
Equipment markers.
Pipe markers.
Valve tags.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C.
Equipment marker data and applicable lettering for each equipment marker.
D.
Valve numbering scheme.
E.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies)
to include in maintenance manuals.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices
for piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A.
Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on
equipment.
1.
Data:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
B.
Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.

Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
Labels of tested compliances.
Location: Accessible and visible.

Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent

adhesive.

(116055)
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

23 05 53 - 1
1.
2.
Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.

Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
C.
Name and plan number.

Equipment service.
Design capacity.
Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for
equipment.
Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type
pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or
as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
D.
Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
E.
Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor
barrier.
F.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers:

back.
G.
Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,
permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1.
2.
2.2
Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches : 3/4 inch
minimum.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2
inches minimum.
VALVE TAGS
A.
Valve Tags: Engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch
numbers, with numbering scheme. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
1.
2.
2.3
Material: 1/16-inch thick laminated plastic.

Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook .
VALVE SCHEDULES
A.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification.
Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

(116055)

23 05 53 - 2
1.
2.
3.
Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry

walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.
Frame: Extruded aluminum.
Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness
glass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A.
3.2
Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If more than
single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's
option.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where
not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the
following general categories of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Fuel-burning units, including boilers.

Pumps.
Heat exchangers.
Air-cooled condensing units.
Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical
equipment.
1.
2.
3.
Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches , 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches , and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to threefourths the size of principal lettering.
Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.
Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general
categories of equipment:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.3
Fuel-burning units, including boilers.

Pumps.
Heat exchangers.
Air-cooled condensing units.
Tanks and pressure vessels.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow
indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1.
2.
3.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches : Pretensioned pipe markers.
Use size to ensure a tight fit.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches : Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2
inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use
size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.

(116055)

23 05 53 - 3
4.
B.
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; and accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior
nonconcealed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3
inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
Near each valve and control device.

Near each branch connection. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at
branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Intermediately spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, and HVAC terminal devices and similar
roughing-in connections of end-use units. Label valves to differentiate between new and
existing valves. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
1.
2.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2 inches , round.

Valve-Tag Color:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Letter Color:
a.
b.
c.
3.5
Refrigerant: Green.
Hot Water: Yellow.
Gas: Natural.
Refrigerant: White.
Hot Water: Black.
Gas: Black.
VALVE SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

A.
3.6
Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major mechanical room.
A.
Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
other work.
B.
Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.

(116055)

23 05 53 - 4
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for following:

1.
Hydronic Piping Systems:

a.
b.
2.
1.2
New pumps.
New heat exchangers.
Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2
copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation"
Article. Include complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
B.
Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage TAB firm certified by either TABB, AABC, or NEBB.
B.
Qualified TAB Firms: Engage one of following approved TAB firms:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Certification of TAB Reports:

following:
1.
2.
D.
1.4
Griffith Engineering Services 303-688-5054

JPG Engineering 303-688-9044.
Jedi Balancing 720-839-5333.]
Midwest of Colorado Springs[ 719-599-0168.
Or other pre-approved District contractor.
Certify TAB field data reports.
This certification includes
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and procedures specified and
referenced in this Specification.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems," NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," SMACNA's "HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing," or TAB firm's forms approved by Engineer.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire TAB period.
Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

(116055)
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

23 05 93 - 1
B.
1.5
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,

HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B.
Perform TAB after pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily
completed.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide guarantee on AABC's "National Standards

for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that
AABC will assist in completing requirements of Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply
with Contract Documents. Guarantee includes following provisions:
B.
Special Guarantee: Provide guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing requirements of Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with Contract
Documents. Guarantee shall include following provisions:
1.
2.
Certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to Contract Documents.
Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1.
Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flowcontrol devices, and balancing valves and fittings are required by Contract Documents.
Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and
appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
B.
Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C.
Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record

Documents."
D.
Examine equipment performance data including pump curves.
E.
Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
F.
Examine system and equipment test reports.

(116055)

23 05 93 - 2
G.
Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, and balancing valves
and fittings, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for
effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
H.
Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
I.
Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that bearings are greased and equipment with functioning
controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
K.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in suction piping.
L.
Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
M.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A.
3.4
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning Systems," NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems," SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and
this Section.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to following, in addition to general
preparation procedures specified above:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

Check expansion tank liquid level.
Check makeup-water pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow.
Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
Check air vents for forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

(116055)

23 05 93 - 3
3.5
PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A.
Measure water flow at pumps. Use following procedures:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify impeller size by operating pump with discharge valve closed. Read pressure
differential across pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage
heights. Note point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that pump has
intended impeller size.
Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across pump
and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until
indicated water flow is achieved.
Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate intended brake horsepower for system
based on pump manufacturer's performance data.
Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
Report flow rates that are not within tolerances established in this Section.
B.
Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, for flow rate indicated.
C.
Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
D.
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
3.6
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A.
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.7
Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.

Motor horsepower rating.
Motor rpm.
Efficiency rating.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A.
Verify proper rotation of fans.
B.
Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C.
Record compressor data.
3.8
PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS

A.
3.9
If hydronic, measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.

PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGER
A.
Measure following data for each heat exchanger:

1.
2.
3.
Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

Water flow rate.
Water pressure drop.

(116055)

23 05 93 - 4
3.10
A.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within following tolerances:
1.
B.
3.11
Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
Report flow rates that are not within tolerances listed above.
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in

three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B.
Include certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by certified testing and balancing
engineer.
1.
C.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Include list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Pump curves.
Manufacturers' test data.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include following data in final report,
as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Title page.
Name and address of TAB firm.
Project name.
Project location.
Engineer's name and address.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of TAB firm who certifies report.
Table of Contents with total number of pages defined for each section of report. Number
each page in report.
Summary of contents including following:
a.
b.
11.
12.
13.
E.
Indicated versus final performance.

Description of system operation sequence if it varies from Contract Documents.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in body of reports varies from indicated values.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Water flow rates.

Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
Balancing stations.
Position of balancing devices.

(116055)

23 05 93 - 5
SECTION 23 07 16
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes semirigid and flexible equipment insulation, insulating cements, fieldapplied jackets, accessories and attachments, and sealing compounds.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if
any), for each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Shop fabrication and installation details for the following:
1.
1.3
Field application for each equipment type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indices of 25 and 50, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS

A.
Glass-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured
from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. With maximum thermal
conductivity of 0.27 btu*in./hr.*ft.*F at 75F mean temperature.
B.
Field-Applied Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

1.
C.
Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
Accessories and Attachments:
1.
2.
3.
Bands: 3/4 inch wide, Aluminum.

Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or
0.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitordischarge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation
thickness indicated.

(116055)
HVAC Equipment Insulation

23 07 16 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
length of ducts and fittings.
C.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet
or dry state.
D.
Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
E.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
F.
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
G.
Seal exposed insulation material with insulating cement.
3.2
EQUIPMENT INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A.
General abbreviations used in following schedule:

1.
G: Glass cloth
EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
EQUIPMENT
Temp.
Range
Heating Hot Water Expansion

Tanks
Heating Hot Water Heat
Exchangers
100F to
200F
100F to
250F
Location
Form
Thickness
Material
Field
Applied
Jacket
Interior
Board
Glass Fiber
Interior
Board
Glass Fiber

(116055)
HVAC Equipment Insulation

23 07 16 - 2
SECTION 23 11 23
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes fuel gas piping within building. Products include following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Pipe, tube, fittings, and joining materials.

Piping specialties.
Specialty valves.
Pressure regulators.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.3
Gas System Pressure: One pressure range. 0.5 psig or less

SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
intended use.
B.
NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2

PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M; Type E or S; Grade B; black. Wall thickness of wrought-steel
pipe shall comply with ASME B36.10M.
1.
2.
3.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with
threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to
ASME B1.20.1.
Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

(116055)
Facility Natural-Gas Piping

23 11 23 - 1
4.
5.
2.3
Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.
B.
Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector.
2.4
SPECIALTY VALVES
A.
Valve End Connections:

1.
2.
Threaded, according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller.
Flanged, according to ASME B16.5 for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
B.
Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and CSA International listed.
C.
Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head,
ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel
disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig minimum pressure rating.
2.5
PRESSURE REGULATORS
A.
Pressure Regulators: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and
corrosion-resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Appliance Pressure Regulators:

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.6
Canadian Meter Co., Inc.

Eaton Corp.; Controls Div.
Harper Wyman Co.
Maxitrol Co.
SCP, Inc.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and
according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
Appliance Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18. Regulator may include vent limiting
device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen in opening if

not connected to vent piping.
A.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for pipe
hanger and support devices.

(116055)

23 11 23 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping.
Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all
equipment is turned off in affected piping section.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Use flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings in applications below, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Fuel Gas Piping, 2 psig or Less:

1.
2.
3.3
NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2-1/2: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
3.4
Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
3.5
Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Materials and Methods" for joint construction
requirements for threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping.
INSTALLATION
A.
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC
B.
Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include
outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not
install where condensate would be subject to freezing.
1.
Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for
removal of plug or cap.
C.
Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings unless specifically
shown to be exposed to view.
D.
Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
E.
Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
F.
Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
G.
Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

(116055)

23 11 23 - 3
H.
Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot
move.
I.
Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated
valve.
J.
Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections.
K.
Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent
to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosionresistant insect screens in large end.
3.6

A.
3.7
Install hangers and support devices according to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. Connect piping to
appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72
inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve.

(116055)

23 11 23 - 4
SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water heating
system; makeup water for this system; and condensate drain piping.
B.
See Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Materials and Methods" for general piping materials and
installation requirements.
C.
See Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
piping.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop
curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated balancing valves.
C.
Product Data: For each hydronic specialty.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear appropriate ASME
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Design for each product is based on requirements of this Section and product scheduled on
Drawings (when applicable).
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either
scheduled product or comparable product by one of manufacturers listed.
1.
Calibrated Balancing Valves

a.

(116055)
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 1
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Expansion Tanks
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Flow Design, Inc.

Gerand Engineering Company.
Griswold Controls.
ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
Taco, Inc.
Amtrol, Inc.
ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
Taco, Inc.
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A.
General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.
B.
Copper Tube and Fittings:

1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Steel Pipe and Fittings:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller:

ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Schedules 40, black steel, plain ends.
Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded),
Grade A, Schedules 40, black steel, plain ends.
Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel;
seamless for NPS 2 and smaller and electric-resistance welded for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250;
raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of
pipe being welded.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and
design temperatures and pressures.
PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 80, plain ends.

1.
2.
2.3
Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.
PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2467.

PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
VALVES
A.
General-Duty Valves: Globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 23
Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
B.
Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125-psig ( working
pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall
have calibrated venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals,

(116055)
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 2
and be equipped with memory stop to retain set position.

C.
Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball type, 125-psig
( working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having flanged, welded, or
grooved connections. Valves shall have calibrated venturi, connections for portable differential
pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with memory stop to retain set position.
D.
Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP.
Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable
seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1.
2.
2.4
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and chained
cap.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A.
Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 225
deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or coin; with NPS 1/2 inlet
connection and NPT 1/8 discharge connection with 20 long x 3/16 OD tubing.
B.
Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating temperature; with
NPS 1/4 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. See Schedule on Drawings for
additional requirements.
C.
Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F
maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design
expansion capacity by flexible bladder securely sealed into tank. Include drain fitting and taps
for pressure gage and air-charging fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base;
support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Factory fabricate and test tank with taps and
supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, Division 1.
D.
Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged
ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover,
perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
E.
Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating
temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded-end connections to match equipment
connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
2.5

A.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for pipe
hanger and support devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Hot Water, NPS 3 and smaller: Aboveground, use Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with
soldered joints or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints.
B.
Hot Water, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.

(116055)
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 3
C.
Condensate Drain Lines: Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints for refrigerant
cooling coil drain pans and Schedule 80 PVC pipe with solvent-welded joints for condensing
boiler drain.
D.
Make-up Water Lines: Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
E.
Where NPS 5 or other non-standard pipe size is indicated on Drawings, contractor shall provide
pipe size indicated or next larger standard pipe size.
3.2
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
See Division 23 Section General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping for types of valves to be used.
B.
Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to
each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in branch line, and
elsewhere as indicated on Drawings.
C.
Install calibrated balancing valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return
connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings.
D.
Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
E.
Unless otherwise indicated, use following special-duty valve types for applications indicated:
1.
2.
3.3
Install calibrated balancing valves in return water line of each heating or cooling element
and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings and as required to facilitate system balancing.
Where shut-off valve is shown or indicated, separate shutoff valve shall be provided.
Calibrated balancing valves shall not be used for shutoff duty.
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
B.
Install hose-end drain valve with cap at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as
required for system drainage.
C.
Install piping at uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
D.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
E.
Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe,
with takeoff coming out top of main pipe.
F.
Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve,
in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection
of strainers. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 and
install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve for strainers NPS 2 and larger.
3.4

A.
Install hangers and supports according to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."

(116055)
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 4
3.5

A.
3.6
Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Materials and Methods" for joint construction
requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, [grooved ]and
flanged joints in steel piping; and solvent-welded joints for PVC piping.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install manual air vents at high points in piping and elsewhere as required for initial and periodic
system air venting. Manual air vents shall be installed to permit air venting without causing
damage to ceiling or other adjacent building materials due to water discharge from vent.
B.
Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping,
at heat exchangers, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings and as required for continuous
system air venting.
C.
Support expansion tank from floor.
3.7
ADJUSTING
A.
Perform these adjustments before operating system:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.8
Open valves to fully open position.

Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design
requirements.
Lubricate motors and bearings.
FLUSH AND CLEANING

A.
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens.
After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable
fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
B.
Notify Project Manager five (5) working days in advance of starting cleaning. Cleaning and
flushing of all systems should take place in presence of Project Manager or his designated
representative. Certification of Work Certificate documents cleaning procedure and personnel
involved. Designated representative observing cleaning shall sign certification. Building
personnel or custodial staff is not authorized to certify procedure.
C.
Closed piping systems, heating water, shall be cleaned using a cold alkaline cleaning solution at
normal system pumping pressures. Use commercially available chemicals furnished by
contractor at no additional cost to Harrison School District 2.
D.
Cleaning solution must begin with minimum pH of 12.0.
E.
Procedure to Clean New Portion of Hydronic System:

1.
2.
Fill system with alkaline cleaning solution. Make sure that cleaning solution circulates
through all piping and heat transfer components in hydronic system.
Circulate alkaline cleaning solution in any heating water or chilled water system for 48
hours. Repair any leaks while circulating.

(116055)
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 5
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Drain alkaline cleaning solution and fill system with domestic cold water. Circulate and
flush as necessary until circulated rinse water reaches a pH of 8.5 maximum at all end
points of hydronic system.
When rinse water has reached 8.5 pH, remove and clean all piping strainers throughout
system. Do not drain rinse water from piping system until propylene glycol is ready to be
installed. District Project Manager or representative must verify and approve cleanliness
of system. Minimum of three samples will be taken of each portion of hydronic system.
Contractor and Owner will each retain one sample and one sample will be sent for
chemical analysis.
Drain and partially fill hydronic system with clean domestic cold water. Install uninhibited
propylene glycol to ensure concentration of 30% in entire system. Owner will sample and
install water treatment chemicals after glycol is charged into system pH bugger, oxygen
scavenger, and corrosion inhibiting surfactant.
Submit Certification of Work Certificate and quantity of propylene glycol that was
charged into piping system. Transmit information to District Project Manager.
Include copy of Certification of Work Certificate, propylene glycol quantity, MSDS
sheets, and name of chemical supplier in O&M Manuals.

(116055)
Hydronic Piping
23 21 13 - 6
SECTION 23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
1.2
In-line circulators.
Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.
Pump Specialty Fittings
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B.
Product Data: For each pump specialty fitting indicated.
C.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
intended use.
B.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Design for each product is based on requirements of this Section and product scheduled on
Drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either scheduled product or
comparable product by one of manufacturers listed.
IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
A.
Cartridge type, horizontal, in-line, compact, seal-less, centrifugal, and single stage. Include
pump and motor assembled on a common shaft in cartridge-type, hermetically sealed unit,
without stuffing boxes or mechanical seals. Include isolation of motor section from motor-stator
windings by corrosion-resistant, nonmagnetic, alloy liner. Include design rated for 125-psig
minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.

Grundfos Pumps Corp.

(116055)
Hydronic Pumps
23 21 23 - 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Casing: Cast bronze or cast iron, with stainless-steel liner, static O-ring seal to separate
motor section from motor stator, and flanged piping connections.
Impeller: Overhung, single suction, closed or open, nonmetallic.
Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft with carbon-steel sleeve.
Motor: Three-speed, unless otherwise indicated.
SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Armstrong Pumps Inc. (ALTERNATE BID NO. 2)

Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries. (BASE BID)
B.
Description:
Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately
coupled, end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting,
with pump and motor shafts horizontal. Rate pump for 125-psig minimum working pressure and
a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F.
C.
Pump Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage
tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged
connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and attached piping
to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or requiring
the realignment of pump and motor shaft.
Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,
and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance.
Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel
spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket.
Packing Seal: Stuffing box, with a minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided
yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing
gland.
Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron housing with
grease fittings.
D.
Shaft Coupling: Molded rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.
Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump
shaft or motor.
E.
Coupling Guard:
Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel;
removable; attached to mounting frame.
F.
Mounting Frame:
Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and
motor.
G.
Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated or grease-lubricated ball bearings, unless
otherwise indicated; secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment. Comply with
requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
H.
Capacities and Characteristics: See Schedule on Drawings.

(116055)
Hydronic Pumps
23 21 23 - 2
2.4
PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A.
Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body and end cap, pumpinlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or
stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory-fabricated support.
B.
Triple-Duty Valves are not permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PUMP INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with HI 1.4.
B.
Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C.
Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D.
Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling before setting. Do not
reconnect couplings until alignment procedure is complete.
1.
2.
3.2
Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with
small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches
between pump base and foundation for grouting.
Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling
faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.
ALIGNMENT
A.
Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been
set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made.
B.
Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C.
Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.11.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation."
D.
After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
E.
Provide verification report stating specific alignment methods used and written verification that
pump and motor are properly aligned to tolerances established by pump manufacturer.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps not
necessarily pump inlet and outlet size.

(116055)
Hydronic Pumps
23 21 23 - 3
D.
Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
E.
Install check valve, calibrated balancing valve, and shut-off valve on discharge side of in-line
pumps.
F.
Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of in-line pumps.
G.
Install check valve and shut-off valve along with calibrated balancing valve, as indicated on
Drawings, on discharge side of base-mounted pumps.
H.
Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.
I.
Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between
pump casing and valves as indicated on Drawings.
J.
Install single pressure gage with multiple input selector valves across pump suction upstream
and downstream of suction diffusers and pump discharge, at integral pressure-gage tappings,
and elsewhere as indicated. Where integral tappings are not present, coordinate with Engineer
for acceptable locations.
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Check piping connections for tightness.
Clean strainers on suction piping.
Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
6.
7.
Verify bearing lubrication.

Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
Verify that pump is properly aligned.
Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
Start motor.
Open discharge valve slowly.

(116055)
Hydronic Pumps
23 21 23 - 4
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes refrigerant piping, valves, and specialties used for air-conditioning
applications.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For tubing and fittings.
B.
Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for thermostatic expansion valves, solenoid
valves, and pressure-regulating valves.
C.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX; "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B.
ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
C.
ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
D.
UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing Components

and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A.
Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR or ASTM B 88, Type L.
B.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver)
E.
Flexible Connectors: 500-psig minimum operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze core, hightensile bronze-braid covering, and solder-joint end connections; dehydrated, pressure tested,
minimum 7 inches long.
2.2
VALVES
A.
Diaphragm Packless Valves: 500-psig working pressure and 275 deg F working temperature;
globe design with straight-through or angle pattern; forged-brass or bronze body and bonnet,

(116055)
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 1
phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless-steel
spring, nylon seat disc, and with solder-end connections.
B.
Packed-Angle Valves: 500-psig working pressure and 275 deg F working temperature; forgedbrass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps with copper gasket, back seating, rising stem and
seat, molded stem packing, and with solder-end connections.
C.
Check Valves Smaller Than NPS 1: 400-psig operating pressure and 285 deg F operating
temperature; cast-brass body, with removable piston, polytetrafluoroethylene seat, and
stainless-steel spring; globe design. Valve shall be straight-through pattern, with solder-end
connections.
D.
Check Valves, NPS 1 and Larger: 400-psig operating pressure and 285 deg F operating
temperature; cast-bronze body, with cast-bronze or forged-brass bolted bonnet; floating piston
with mechanically retained polytetrafluoroethylene seat disc. Valve shall be straight-through or
angle pattern, with solder-end connections.
E.
Service Valves: 500-psig pressure rating; forged-brass body with copper stubs, brass caps,
removable valve core, integral ball check valve, and with solder-end connections.
F.
Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760; 250 deg F temperature rating and 400-psig working
pressure; forged brass, with polytetrafluoroethylene valve seat, 2-way, straight-through pattern,
and solder-end connections; manual operator; fitted with suitable NEMA 250 enclosure of type
required by location, with 1/2-inch conduit adapter and 24 or 120-V coil.
G.
Pressure-Regulating Valves: Comply with ARI 770; pilot operated, forged brass or cast bronze,
stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-V dc standard coil, and wroughtcopper fittings for solder-end connections; suitable for refrigerant specified.
H.
Pressure Relief Valves: Straight-through or angle pattern, brass body and disc, neoprene seat,
and factory sealed and ASME labeled for standard pressure setting.
I.
Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750; brass body with stainless-steel parts;
thermostatic-adjustable, modulating type; size and operating characteristics as recommended
by manufacturer of evaporator, and factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end
connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line, and
external equalizer line.
2.3
REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES

A.
Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 500-psig working pressure; forged-brass or steel body with
stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen of 80 to 100 mesh in liquid lines up to 11/8 inches, 60 mesh in larger liquid lines, and 40 mesh in suction lines; with screwed cleanout
plug and solder-end connections.
B.
Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig maximum working pressure and 200 deg F operating
temperature; all-brass body with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color-coded
moisture indicator; with solder-end connections.
C.
Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 500-psig maximum working pressure; heavy gage protected

with corrosion-resistant-painted steel shell, flanged ring and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with
steel cap screws; wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit,
including gaskets and the following:
1.
Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated alumina,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.

(116055)
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 2
D.
2.4
Mufflers: 500-psig operating pressure, welded-steel construction with fusible plug; sized for
refrigeration capacity.
REFRIGERANTS
A.
ASHRAE 34, R-410a: Difluoromethane / Pentafluoroethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
3.2
Type ACR or Type L drawn-copper tubing.

VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of

compressor, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on each side of strainers.
B.
Install check valves in compressor discharge lines and in condenser liquid lines on multiple
condenser systems.
C.
Install packed-angle valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve and thermostatic
expansion valve for system charging.
D.
Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid
and suction lines at evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.
E.
Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around each dryer.
F.
Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve.

1.
2.
G.
4.
3.3
Coordinate
Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to evaporator.

1.
2.
3.
H.
Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections.
electrical requirements and connections.
If refrigerant distributors are used, install them directly on expansion-valve outlet.

Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do
not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line
pressure at bulb location.
Install pressure-regulating and pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15.

pressure relief valve discharge to outside.
Pipe
SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A.
Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and on
leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
B.
Install strainers immediately upstream from each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, and compressor suction valves.

(116055)
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 3
C.
Install strainers in main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are
used.
D.
Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic expansion
valves and in liquid line to receiver.
E.
Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and before each
solenoid valve.
F.
Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down
compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil bleeder
lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system
shuts down.
G.
Install receivers, sized to accommodate pump-down charge, on systems 5 tons and larger and
on systems with long piping runs.
H.
Install flexible connectors at or near compressors.
3.4
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
B.
C.
Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
D.
Install piping on roof, not below roof.
E.
Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install
valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
F.
Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit
installation of full-thickness insulation.
G.
Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
Liquid lines may be installed level.
H.
Install bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than NPS 2.
I.
Install unions to allow removal of equipment, solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, and
expansion valves and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
J.
When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats,
and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near
expansion valve bulb.

(116055)
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 4
3.5

A.
3.6
Install supports according to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
A.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Materials and Methods" for brazed joints in copper
tubing.
B.
Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
scale formation.
3.7

A.
Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1.
2.
Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.
Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the
design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of
system.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.8
System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution
over joint.
Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
SYSTEM CHARGING
A.
Charge system using the following procedures:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Install core in filter-dryer after leak test but before evacuation.

Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers.
If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-operating
charge.

(116055)
Refrigerant Piping
23 23 00 - 5
SECTION 23 51 00
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.

1.
1.2
Listed double-wall chimneys.
SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
Special gas vents.
Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2

LISTED SPECIAL GAS VENT
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Heat-Fab Inc.
Metal-Fab, Inc.
B.
Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F
continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211 and suitable for
condensing-gas appliances.
C.
Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least 1/2-inch airspace.
D.
Inner Shell: ASTM 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel.
E.
Outer Jacket: Aluminized or stainless steel.
F.
Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof

flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners;
fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same
assembly.
1.
Termination: As specified by boiler manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

(116055)
Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks

23 51 00 - 1
3.1
INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS

A.
Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights
according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.
B.
Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents according to manufacturer's written

installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all
accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.
D.
Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest
point piped to nearest drain.

(116055)
Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks

23 51 00 - 2
SECTION 23 52 16
CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, fire-tube

condensing boilers, trim and accessories for generating hot water.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties and
accessories.
1.
Prior to flue vent installation, engineered calculations and drawings must be submitted to
Engineer to thoroughly demonstrate that size and configuration conform to recommended
size, length and footprint for each submitted boiler.
B.
Efficiency Curves: At a minimum, submit efficiency curves for 100%, 50%, and 5% input firing
rates at incoming water temperatures ranging from 60F to 160F. Test protocols shall conform
to AERCOs AE-1 standards and shall be witnessed and reviewed by an independent,
third-party group.
C.
Pressure Drop Curve: Submit pressure drop curve for flows ranging from 0 GPM to maximum
value of boiler.
D.
Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim and accessories, include:

1.
2.
Plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work

Wiring Diagrams for power, signal and control wiring
E.
Source Quality Control Test Reports: Reports shall be included in submittals.
F.
Field Quality Control Test Reports: Reports shall be included in submittals.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Data to be included in boiler emergency, operation and
maintenance manuals.
H.
Warranty: Standard warranty specified in this Section
I.
Other Informational Submittals

1.
1.3
ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of
authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic
testing of piping external to boiler.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Boilers must be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
B.
I=B=R Performance Compliance: Condensing boilers must be rated in accordance with

applicable federal testing methods and verified by AHRI as capable of achieving the energy

(116055)
Condensing Boilers
23 52 16 - 1
efficiency and performance ratings as tested within prescribed tolerances.

C.
ASME Compliance: Condensing boilers must be constructed in accordance with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV Heating Boilers.
D.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas
and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."
E.
DOE Compliance. Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N,
"Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers."
F.
UL Compliance. Boilers must be tested for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial Gas
Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to
G.
NOx Emission Standards. When installed and operated in accordance with manufacturers
instructions, condensing boilers shall comply with the NOx emission standards outlined in South
Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), Rule 1146.2; and the Texas Commission on
Environmental Quality (TCEQ), Title 30, Chapter 117, Rule 117.465.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
1.5
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
WARRANTY
A.
Standard Warranty: Boilers shall include manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period for Fire-Tube Condensing Boilers
a.
b.
c.
The pressure vessel/heat exchanger shall carry a 10-year from shipment, prorated,
limited warranty against any failure due to condensate corrosion, thermal stress,
mechanical defects or workmanship.
Manufacturer labeled control panels are conditionally warranted against failure for
(2) two years from shipment.
All other components, with the exception of the igniter and flame detector, are
conditionally guaranteed against any failure for 18 months from shipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by AERCO

International.
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Description: Boiler shall be natural gas fired, fully condensing, fire tube design. Power burner
shall have full modulation (the minimum firing rate shall not exceed 75,000 BTU/HR input.
Boilers that have an input greater than 75,000 BTU/Hr at minimum fire will not be considered)
and discharge into a positive pressure vent. Boiler efficiency shall increase with decreasing load
(output), while maintaining setpoint. Boiler shall be factory-fabricated, factory-assembled and

(116055)
Condensing Boilers
23 52 16 - 2
factory-tested, fire-tube condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure-tight, built on a
steel base, including insulated jacket, flue-gas vent, combustion-air intake connections, water
supply, return and condensate drain connections, and controls.
B.
Heat Exchanger: The heat exchanger shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel fire tubes and
tubesheets, with a one-pass combustion gas flow design. The fire tubes shall be 5/8 OD, with
no less than 0.065 wall thickness. The upper and lower stainless steel tubesheet shall be no
less than 0.313 thick. The pressure vessel/heat exchanger shall be welded construction. The
heat exchanger shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure not less than 160 psig. Access
to the tubesheets and heat exchanger shall be available by burner and exhaust manifold
removal. Minimum access opening shall be no less than 8-inch diameter.
C.
Pressure Vessel: The pressure vessel shall have a maximum water volume of 27 gallons. The
boiler water pressure drop shall not exceed 4.9 psig at 130 gpm. The boiler water connections
shall be 3-inch flanged 150-pound, ANSI rated. The pressure vessel shall be constructed of
SA53 carbon steel, with a 0.25-inch thick wall and 0.50-inch thick upper head. Inspection
openings in the pressure vessel shall be in accordance with ASME Section IV pressure vessel
code. The boiler shall be designed so that the thermal efficiency increases as the boiler firing
rate decreases.
D.
Modulating Air/Fuel Valve and Burner: The boiler burner shall be capable of a 20-to-1 turndown
ratio of the firing rate without loss of combustion efficiency or staging of gas valves. The burner
shall produce less than 16 ppm of NOx corrected to 3% excess oxygen. The unit shall be
certified by the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) as compliant with Rule
1146.2 for boilers and water heaters less than or equal to 2 MBTUs, and the Texas Commission
on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) as being compliant with Section 117.465 for boilers and water
heaters less than or equal to 2 MBTUs. The burner shall be metal-fiber mesh covering a
stainless steel body with spark ignition and flame rectification. All burner material exposed to the
combustion zone shall be of stainless steel construction. There shall be no moving parts within
the burner itself. A modulating air/fuel valve shall meter the air and fuel input. The modulating
motor must be linked to both the gas valve body and air valve body with a single linkage. The
linkage shall not require any field adjustment. A variable frequency drive (VFD), controlled cast
aluminum pre-mix blower shall be used to ensure the optimum mixing of air and fuel between
the air/fuel valve and the burner.
E.
Minimum boiler efficiencies shall be as follows at a 20 degree delta-T:
EWT
100% Fire
50% Fire
5% Fire
160 F
86%
86.6%
88%
120 F
88.5%
89.1%
90.9%
60 F
95.5%
97.5%
99.3%
F.
The exhaust manifold shall be of corrosion resistant cast aluminum with a 6-inch diameter flue
connection. The exhaust manifold shall have a collecting reservoir and a gravity drain for the
elimination of condensation.
G.
Blower. The boiler shall include a variable-speed, DC centrifugal fan to operate during the
burner firing sequence and pre-purge the combustion chamber.
1.
Motors: Blower motors shall comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section
"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
a.
H.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require a motor to operate in the service factor range above 1.0.
Ignition: Ignition shall be via spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff and electronic

(116055)
Condensing Boilers
23 52 16 - 3
flame supervision.
2.3
CONTROLS
A.
Refer to Division 23, Section Instrumentation and Control of HVAC.
B.
The boiler control system shall be segregated into three components: C-More Control Panel,
Power Box and Input/Output Connection Box. The entire system shall be Underwriters
Laboratories recognized.
C.
The control panel shall consist of six individual circuit boards using state-of-the-art surfacemount technology in a single enclosure. These circuit boards shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A display board incorporating LED display to indicate temperature and a vacuum

fluorescent display module for all message enunciation
A CPU board housing all control functions
An electric low-water cutoff board with test and manual reset functions
A power supply board
An ignition /stepper board incorporating flame safeguard control
A connector board
Each board shall be individually field replaceable.

D.
The combustion safeguard/flame monitoring system shall use spark ignition and a rectificationtype flame sensor.
E.
The control panel hardware shall support both RS-232 and RS-485 remote communications.
F.
The controls shall annunciate boiler and sensor status and include extensive self-diagnostic
capabilities that incorporate a minimum of eight separate status messages and 34 separate
fault messages.
G.
The control panel shall incorporate three self-governing features designed to enhance operation
in modes where it receives an external control signal by eliminating nuisance faults due to overtemperature, improper external signal or loss of external signal. These features include:
H.
1.
Setpoint High Limit: Setpoint high limit allows for a selectable maximum boiler outlet
temperature and acts as temperature limiting governor. Setpoint limit is based on a PID
function that automatically limits firing rate to maintain outlet temperature within a 0 to 10
degree selectable band from the desired maximum boiler outlet temperature.
2.
Setpoint Low Limit: Setpoint low limit allows for a selectable minimum operating
temperature.
3.
Failsafe Mode: Failsafe mode allows the boiler to switch its mode to operate from an
internal setpoint if its external control signal is lost, rather than shut off. This is a
selectable mode, enabling the control can to shut off the unit upon loss of external signal,
if so desired.
The boiler control system shall incorporate the following additional features for enhanced
external system interface:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
System start temperature feature

Pump delay timer
Auxiliary start delay timer
Auxiliary temperature sensor
Analog output feature to enable simple monitoring of temperature setpoint, outlet
temperature or fire rate
Remote interlock circuit

(116055)
Condensing Boilers
23 52 16 - 4
7.
8.
Delayed interlock circuit

Fault relay for remote fault alarm
I.
Each boiler shall include an electric, single-seated combination safety shutoff valve/regulator
with proof of closure switch in its gas train. Each boiler shall incorporate dual over-temperature
protection with manual reset, in accordance with ASME Section IV and CSD-1.
J.
Boiler Management System (BMS): The Boiler Manufacturer shall supply as part of the boiler
package a completely integrated Boiler Management System Programmer to control all
operation and energy input of the multiple boiler heating plant. The Boiler Management System
shall be comprised of a microprocessor based control utilizing the MODBUS protocol to
communicate with the Boilers via the RS-485 port. The BMS controller shall have the ability to
operate up to 32 boilers per BMS panel.
The controller shall have the ability to vary the firing rate and energy input of each individual
boiler throughout its full modulating range to maximize the condensing capability and thermal
efficiency output of the entire heating plant. The BMS shall control the boiler outlet header
temperature within +2F. The controller shall be a PID type controller and uses Ramp Up/Ramp
Down control algorithm for accurate temperature control with excellent variable load response.
The BMS controller shall provide contact closure for auxiliary equipment such as system pumps
and combustion air inlet dampers based upon outdoor air temperature.
When set on Internal Setpoint Mode, temperature control setpoint on the BMS shall be fully field
adjustable from 50F to 190F in operation. When set on Indoor/Outdoor Reset Mode, the BMS
will operate on an adjustable inverse ratio in response to outdoor temperature to control the
main header temperature. Reset ratio shall be fully field adjustable from 0.3 to 3.0 in operation.
When set on 4ma to 20ma Temperature Control Mode, the BMS will operate the plant to vary
header temperature setpoint linearly as an externally applied 4-20 ma signal is supplied.
When set on MODBUS Temperature Control Mode, the BMS will operate the plant to vary
header temperature setpoint as an external communication utilizing the MODBUS protocol is
supplied via the RS-232 port. The BMS controller shall have a vacuum fluorescent display for
monitoring of all sensors and interlocks. Non-volatile memory backup of all control parameters
shall be internally provided as standard. The controller will automatically balance the sequence
of operating time on each boiler by a first-on first-off mode and provide for setback and remote
alarm contacts. Connection between central BMS system and individual boilers shall be twisted
pair low voltage wiring, with the boilers daisy-chained for ease of installation.
2.4
ELECTRICAL POWER
A.
Controllers, Electrical Devices and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 26 sections.
B.
Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and factory-wired switches, motor

controllers, transformers and other electrical devices shall provide a single-point field power
connection to the boiler.
C.
Electrical Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Voltage:
120 V
Phase: Single
Frequency: 60 Hz
Full-Load Current 13 Amps

(116055)
Condensing Boilers
23 52 16 - 5
2.5
VENTING
A.
The exhaust vent must be UL Listed for use with Category III and IV appliances and compatible
with operating temperatures up to 480F, positive pressure, condensing flue gas service.
UL-listed vents of Al 29-4C stainless steel must be used with boilers.
B.
The minimum exhaust vent duct size for each boiler is six-inch diameter.
C.
Combustion-Air Intake: Boilers shall be capable of drawing combustion air from the outdoors via
a metal or PVC duct connected between the boiler and the outdoors.
D.
The minimum sealed combustion air duct size for each boiler is six-inch diameter.
E.
Common Vent and Common Combustion Air must be an available option for boiler installation.
Consult manufacturer for common vent and combustion air sizing.
F.
Follow guidelines specified in manufacturers venting guide.
2.6
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide,
oxides of nitrogen emissions and carbon monoxide in flue gas, and to achieve combustion
efficiency. Perform hydrostatic testing.
B.
Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
1.
C.
If boilers are not factory assembled and fire-tested, the local vendor is responsible for all
field assembly and testing.
Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Architect fourteen days in
advance of testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes
and locations. Examine piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes and
other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance and operations.
1.
Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations
before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
B.
Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
BOILER INSTALLATION
A.
Install boilers level on concrete bases. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 Section
"Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements are
specified in Division 03.
B.
Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

(116055)
Condensing Boilers
23 52 16 - 6
C.
Assemble and install boiler trim.
D.
Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.
E.
Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to boiler to permit service and maintenance.
C.
Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full
size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.
D.
Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with unions. Piping shall be at least full size of gas
train connection. Provide a reducer if required.
E.
Connect hot-water piping to supply and return boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or
flange at each connection.
F.
Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.
G.
Boiler Venting
1.
2.
Install flue venting kit and combustion-air intake.

Connect venting full size to boiler connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23
Section "Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks."
H.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
I.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4

A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections

1.
Installation and Startup Test: Perform installation and startup checks according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Leak Test: Perform hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3.
Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust
air-fuel ratio and combustion.
4.
Controls and Safeties: Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set points
of fuel supply, water level and water temperature.

(116055)
Condensing Boilers
23 52 16 - 7
b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 2 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to
two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
E.
Performance Tests
The boiler manufacturer is expected to provide partial load thermal efficiency curves. These
thermal efficiency curves must include at least three separate curves at various BTU input
levels. If these curves are not available, it is the responsibility of the boiler manufacturer to
complete the following performance tests:
1.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies

and equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performance testing.
2.
Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field

performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment to comply.
3.
Perform field performance tests to determine capacity and efficiency of boilers.

a. Test for full capacity.
b. Test for boiler efficiency at [low fire 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 80, 60, 40 and 20] percent of
full capacity. Determine efficiency at each test point.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated.

Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance.
Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat
produced during tests if building systems are not adequate.
Notify Engineer in advance of test dates.
Document test results in a report and submit to Architect.

(116055)
Condensing Boilers
23 52 16 - 8
SECTION 23 62 13
PACKAGED AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes air-cooled condensing units.

SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Wiring diagrams.
C.
D.
Provide certified letter indicating quantity of refrigerant in each system and at each school.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
intended use.
B.
Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration."
1.4
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
2.
Warranty Period (Compressor Only): Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period (Condenser Coil Only): Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers

specified.
CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 6 TO 120 TONS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
McQuay International. (ALTERNATE BID NO. 1)

Trane Co. (The); Worldwide Applied Systems Group. (BASE BID)
York International Corp. (ALTERNATE BID NO. 1)

(116055)
Packaged Air-Cooled Condensing Units

23 62 13 - 1
B.
Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing, compressors,
condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.
C.
Compressor: Scroll compressor designed for service with crankcase sight glass, crankcase
heater, and backseating service access valves on suction and discharge ports.
1.
Capacity Control: Compressor staging.
D.
Condenser Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, including subcooling circuit and
backseating liquid-line service access valve. Factory pressure test coils, then dehydrate by
drawing a vacuum and fill with a holding charge of nitrogen or refrigerant.
E.
Condenser Fans: Propeller-type vertical discharge; direct-driven. Include the following:

1.
2.
3.
F.
Operating and safety controls include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
G.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Electronic programmable thermostat to control condensing unit and evaporator fan.

Low Ambient Option: Permits operation down to 50 deg F.
Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and
controls and with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser
fans, motors, and drives. Additional features include the following:
1.
I.
Manual-reset, high-pressure cutout switches.

Automatic-reset, low-pressure cutout switches.
Low oil pressure cutout switch.
Compressor-winding thermostat cutout switch.
Three-leg, compressor-overload protection.
Control transformer.
Magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.
Timer to prevent excessive compressor cycling.
Phase monitor.
Accessories:
1.
2.
H.
Permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors.

Separate motor for each fan.
Dynamically and statically balanced fan assemblies.
Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces; treated and finished with
manufacturer's standard paint coating.
Perimeter base rail with forklift slots and lifting holes to facilitate rigging.
Gasketed control panel door.
Nonfused disconnect switch, factory mounted and wired, for single external electrical
power connection.
Condenser coil hail guard to protect coil from physical damage.
Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 340/360.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270.

(116055)

23 62 13 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
B.
Install roof-mounting units on existing/modified equipment mounting supports indicated on

Drawings. Anchor unit to supports with removable fasteners.
C.
Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
D.
Install tubing so it does not interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories.
E.
Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required access to unit.
Install furnished field-mounted accessories. Refrigerant piping and specialties are specified in
Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping."
3.2

A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection.

Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks.
Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
Verify proper airflow over coils.
B.
Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to
structure.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning condensing units and retest as specified above.
cEND OF SECTION 23 62 13

(116055)

23 62 13 - 3
SECTION 23 82 16
AIR COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes air coils.

SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities of selected models, pressure drop, installation
instructions, and startup instructions for each unit indicated.
B.
Provide certified letter indicating quantity of refrigerant in each system and at each school.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ARI 410, "Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils," for
components, construction, and rating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide coils by one of following manufacturers:

1.
Refrigerant Coils
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.2
Carrier Corporation.
Dunham-Bush, Inc.
McQuay International.
Precision Coils.
Trane Co. (The).
York International Corporation
REFRIGERANT COILS
A.
Description: Coil designed for use with R-410A refrigerant, fabricated to ARI 410, connected
with brazed fittings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Capacity Reduction: Circuit for intertwined control.

Tubes: Copper, complying with ASTM B 75.
Fins: Aluminum with fin spacing as required to comply with scheduled capacities.
Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.
Suction and Distributor: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints.
Frames : 16 gauge galvanized-steel channel frame.
Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410 for working
pressure of 300 psig.
Source Quality Control: Test to 450 psig, and to 300 psig underwater.

(116055)
Air Coils
23 82 16 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install coils in existing air handling units.
B.
Install stainless-steel drain pan under each cooling coil.

1.
2.
3.2
Construct drain pans to comply with ASHRAE 62, to extend beyond coil length and width
and to connect to condensate trap and drainage.
Extend drain pan 5 inches upstream from coil face, 10 inches downstream from coil face,
and extend under coil headers and exposed supply piping.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install piping adjacent to coils to allow service and maintenance.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow coils to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.
C.
Install condensate drain piping from drain pans to nearest floor drain.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Straighten bent fins on each air coil.
CLEANING
A.
After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
B.
Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and clean
inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.

(116055)
Air Coils
23 82 16 - 2
SECTION 26 00 10
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL.
1.1
RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
The Bidding Requirements, Conditions of Contract, General Specifications and General

Requirements, and this Division shall be binding on the Contractor and shall apply to all electrical
work to be completed under Division 26, 27 and 28.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the work from the date of this contract until its acceptance
by the Owner, and must repair all damages sustained from whatever cause. The contractor shall
use proper care and diligence in bracing and securing all parts of the work and shall in all cases
judge as to the amount of protection required.
1.2

A.
All work shall conform to the rules and regulations of the National Electrical Code, Local Code,
Occupational Safety and Health Act and the Fire Marshall's Office. All certificates of approval shall
be delivered to the Owner before final payment will be made.
B.
Should any change in the drawings and/or specifications be required to conform to the above
mentioned laws and ordinances, the Owner shall be notified by the Bidder prior to the bid date, so
that the necessary changes may be completed. After the bid date, all work necessary to meet the
requirements shall be at the Contractor's expense with no additional cost to the Owner.
C.
The Contractor shall pay for all fees, permits, taxes, inspections, connections, etc., associated with
the work under this contract. Any costs, charges, or connection fees which are required to obtain
permanent and temporary electrical service to the project facility will be paid by the Contractor as
part of this contract.
1.3

A.
The data given herein and on the drawings is as exact as could be secured insofar as building
construction and existing conditions are concerned. Extreme accuracy is not guaranteed. The
drawings and specifications are intended for the assistance of the Contractor in achieving the end
result. Exact locations, measurements, distance, levels, etc., will be governed by conditions at the
job site.
B.
The Contractor shall verify that the size of the equipment supplied by the selected manufacturers
does not exceed the available mounting space.
C.
The Engineer reserves the right to change location or size of conduits, outlets, fixtures or other
pieces of equipment as may be necessary to avoid conflicts. No extra compensation will be allowed
for such changes unless additional cost to the Contractor is caused.
D.
It is strongly recommended that the bidders visit the project site so that they may have knowledge of
conditions at the job site and adapt their bids and work to such conditions.
1.4

A.
Anything mentioned in this specification and not shown on the drawings, or vice versa, shall be of
like effect, as shown or mentioned in both. In any case of discrepancy or differences in the figures,
drawings or specifications, the Bidder shall promptly report such discrepancies to the Owner who

(116055)
General Electrical
26 00 10-1
shall make a decision in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor without this decision shall be at
the expense of the Contractor.
1.5
A.
The Contractor shall give his personal superintendence and direction to the work. He shall also
keep a competent foreman or superintendent on the project.
B.
All equipment, controls and junction boxes shall be located for ready access, operation, repair and
maintenance.
C.
Any additional drawings necessary for the prosecution of the work will be furnished by the Architect
as promptly as possible. The Contractor shall request any additional instructions needed and shall
do no work without drawings and instructions.
D.
Any discrepancies between the mechanical, electrical, structural and architectural drawings shall be
reported to the Owner prior to the Bid Date.
1.6
GUARANTEE
A.
The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, workmanship and the successful operation of all
apparatus furnished and installed by him for a period of one year from the date of the final
acceptance of the whole work, and shall guarantee to repair or replace at his own expense any part
of the apparatus which may show defect during that time, provided such defect is, in the opinion of
the Architect, due to imperfect material or workmanship and not to carelessness or improper
operation. Guarantee period for the replacement shall begin with the date of replacement.
B.
The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any failure of any part or parts which occur during the
guarantee period.
C.
The Contractor shall also guarantee the systems and the apparatus to be working properly to meet
all conditions as specified.
1.7
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Shop drawings, catalog sheets and manufacturer's data shall be submitted in accordance with the
requirements of Paragraph "Shop Drawings" of the General Conditions. On or before thirty days
after award of contract; the Contractor shall submit electronic copies (PDF format) of all fabricated
work and equipment to be purchased. Data shall be sufficiently completed to permit evaluation and
comparison with specified equipment and material. Refer to the table at the end of this section for a
summary of the requirements. The table is not project specific and may indicate submittals that are
not required for this project. Refer to the individual specification sections for the required submittals.
B.
All drawings shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval and must be dated.
C.
Shop drawings and/or catalog and data sheets shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Lighting Fixtures
Contactors and Time Clocks
Low Voltage Switching System
Panelboards, Switchboard, Motor Control Centers, Disconnect Devices, Transformers
Emergency Engine Generator, Transfer Switch, Auxiliary Equipment
Fire Alarm System Components
Security System Components
Public Address System Components
Audio System Components
Boxes and Devices

(116055)
General Electrical
26 00 10-2
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Fuses
Lighting System Components (sensors, relays, etc.)
Wireway, Cable Tray, Surface Mounted Raceway
Programmable Lighting System.
Light Dimming Equipment
Lamps
Wiring Devices (switches, receptacles, etc.)
Device Wall Plates
Structured Cable System Components (Cable, Jacks, Terminal Blocks, Racks, etc)
D.
A notation shall be made on each item submitted as to its specified use or description of specific
location in the work.
E.
None of the preceding items shall be purchased, delivered to the site or installed until the item has
been properly submitted in writing and reviewed by the Engineer.
F.
Submittals shall be made even though the item is exactly as specified.
G.
Should the Contractor fail to comply with any of the requirements as stated, the Engineer or Owner
reserves the right to select a full line of materials, appliances, and equipment which shall be final
and binding upon the Contractor.
1.8
SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Review of submittal data is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and
general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Any action shown is
subject to the requirements of the plans and specifications. Contractor is responsible for:
dimensions that shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and
techniques of construction, coordination of his work with that of all other trades and the satisfactory
performance of his work.
B.
Contractor will be limited to one review on a singular piece of equipment.
C.
The listing of a manufacturer as "acceptable" does not imply automatic compliance with contract
documents. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to insure that any price quotations received
and submittals made are for equipment/systems which meet or exceed the specifications included
herein.
1.9
A.

specified herein and on the drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer not less than 10 days prior
to bid date.
B.
specified equipment and material.
C.
Requests for substitutions shall be accompanied by a written comparison between the specified
item and the substituted item. Request submittals shall be accompanied by complete technical
data, including laboratory reports, if applicable on the proposed product. Each item proposed for
substitution shall be clearly identified. Explain fully the differences, if any, between the proposed
product and the products named in the Specifications. Failure to provide the above information may
result in the rejection of the submittal.
D.
Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. If the substitution is not
accepted, provide specified product.

(116055)
General Electrical
26 00 10-3
E.
1.10
If at any time during the project it is determined that a product has been misrepresented as an equal
to a specified product. The contractor shall be required to replace the product at their expense.
This stipulation applies even if the engineer has provided his/her stamp of approval.
RE-SUBMITTAL AND ALTERNATE PRODUCT
A.
Submittals: The Contractor is urged to carefully review each submittal from their suppliers and subsubcontractors for compliance to minimize re-submittal review charges. The Engineer has included
in their contract with the Owner, one (1) review for each submittal item. Therefore, the Contractor
shall agree to pay the Engineer to review any and all re-submittals for this project. Re-submittal
reviews will be billed at a rate of $75.00/hour and shall be paid before final payment to the
Contractor for this project.
B.
As-Built Drawings: The Engineer has included in their contract with the Owner, preparation of asbuilt drawings based on changes required due to conflicts with the bid documents only. Therefore,
the contractor shall agree to pay the Engineer to make revisions required due to equipment
substitution, or field changes requested or initiated by the Contractor. Whether or not the
requirement for compensation is enforced is left to the discretion of the Engineer.
1.11
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Schedule of values shall be submitted within 30 days after award of contract or as specified in
Division 1 or General Conditions of contract.
B.
The schedule of values shall be broken down by individual specification section and shall delineate
materials and labor. Specific cost breakdown information provided to the engineer will be held in
confidence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PROTECTION OF FIXTURES AND WARES

A.
2.2
The Contractor shall apply the necessary protective coverage to fixtures and other equipment to
prevent scratches and mars to such equipment.
STORAGE
A.
2.3
The Contractor shall provide and be responsible for safe storage of his materials and such storage
shall not interfere with the work of others or progress of the project in any manner.
EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
A.
Provide enclosures that mate properly with the equipment to be enclosed and are NEMA rated to
suit the atmospheric conditions of the equipment surroundings.
B.
Equipment in a corrosive atmosphere shall be rated NEMA 4X. All NEMA 4X equipment shall be
fabricated from suitable non-metallic material or shall be stainless steel. Painted steel is not
acceptable for NEMA 4X applications.
2.4
PAINTING (Refer to painting specification for appropriate preparation and materials)

A.
In finished spaces, the contractor shall paint all exposed mounting hardware and fasteners to match
the equipment, fixture or component that is being mounted.

(116055)
General Electrical
26 00 10-4
B.
All exposed conduit, boxes, mounting hardware, etc. in rooms to be painted shall be painted to
match the surrounding surface. Exposed conduit, boxes, mounting hardware, etc. installed in
rooms that are not painted may be left un-painted. Unless otherwise noted, prior approval must be
obtained before mounting exposed conduit, boxes, etc.
C.
All exposed conduit, boxes, covers, enclosures, etc. on the exterior of the building must be painted
to match the surrounding surfaces. Unless otherwise noted, prior approval must be obtained before
mounting exposed conduit, boxes, etc.
D.
Exterior pad mounted transformers, generators, etc. shall be painted to blend into the building
and/or landscape as directed by the Engineer/Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COORDINATION
A.
Before installing any work, the Contractor shall coordinate the electrical work with all other
contractors on the project, with the electric utility company and the City Code enforcing department.
B.
All electrical work shall be installed in proper sequence and so arranged with other trades that there
will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts of all piping systems
and mechanical equipment.
C.
The Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of
equipment and conduit as indicated without major alteration. If alterations are required, a detailed
drawing of the proposed departure due to actual field conditions or other causes shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval.
D.
Whenever interferences might occur, before installing any of the work in question, the Electrical
Contractor shall consult with other contractors and shall come to an agreement with them as to the
exact location and level of his conduit, light fixtures, and/or parts of his installation.
E.
Where recessed electrical devices (speakers, fixtures, etc.) are installed in fire-rated ceilings, the
Contractor shall provide an enclosure approved by authorities having jurisdiction to surround each
device as required to maintain the fire integrity rating of the ceiling. Adequate clearance between
device and enclosure shall be provided in accordance with device manufacturer's
recommendations. Verify clearance requirements with device manufacturer prior to installation of
fixture.
F.
When low voltage cabling is required to penetrate through a fire rated partition and the cabling is not
installed in a sealed metallic conveyance, provide an approved fire rated "Thru-Wall Fitting" such as
the Wiremold Flame Stopper Series unit.
G.
All changes in the work of the Contractor, caused by their neglect to follow these instructions, shall
be made at this Contractor's expense.
3.2
DITCHING, EXCAVATION, AND BACKFILLING

A.
Contractor shall do all excavation required to install conduits and equipment shown on drawings or
required for proper operation. Excess excavation below the required level shall be backfilled with
earth and thoroughly tamped.

(116055)
General Electrical
26 00 10-5
3.3
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Coordinate the hook up of the following equipment with the Contractor required to furnish and install
them. See the appropriate sections in the General Construction Work specifications for further
information.
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.4
Mechanical Equipment
Cabinetry Equipment
Owner Furnished Equipment
Verify fuse or circuit breaker requirements for electrical connections to equipment and provide
overcurrent devices accordingly.
A.
Inasmuch as work under this contract includes adding to the existing building, it shall be the
responsibility of each bidder to fully inform themselves of any and all conditions which influence or
are influenced by work contemplated by these specifications and accompanying drawings. The
submission of a proposal by any bidder will be construed as an admission by him that he has
examined and is fully familiar with the premises and all conditions thereon and adjacent thereto, and
has included in this proposal a proper and adequate amount to cover rearrangement of old work for
the proper installation and operation of the new and existing equipment as shown on the drawings
specified herein, or as required. Such work shall be neatly and properly done.
B.
Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to occupied areas and operational facilities, unless
otherwise indicated, or when authorized otherwise in writing by Owner, or Architect. Provide
temporary service during interruptions to existing facilities. When necessary, schedule momentary
outages for replacing existing wiring systems with new wiring systems. When that "cutting-over" has
been successfully accomplished, remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated.
C.
The operation of all special systems within the building shall be maintained, including but not limited
to; fire alarm, telephone, intercom, data communications, security, emergency call, etc. Provide
temporary connections and/or equipment as required to maintain operations during construction.
Anticipated momentary outages in any system must be scheduled with the owner before starting
work.
3.5
DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A.
Existing conduits may, at the Contractor's option, be removed, or reused.
B.
Conduits may not be abandoned in place in unfinished and accessible areas. Conduits may be
abandoned in place when concealed in walls, floors and/or above hard ceilings.
C.
All conduits to be reused shall be thoroughly tested and checked for continuity.
D.
Electrical items must be removed where they interfere with or are not concealed by new
construction such as new ceilings, walls, etc.
E.
Existing fixtures, outlets, receptacles and other equipment and material shall be relocated, removed,
reconnected or left in place as indicated on the drawings. Where an existing device is shown
removed from an existing circuit, new wiring shall be provided as required to insure continuity of
existing circuit. If existing devices or other electrical items, such as electrically operated equipment
interfere with the location of a new partition, relocation of existing equipment, new equipment, etc.,
the existing items including electrical components of electrically operated equipment shall be
disconnected and removed or satisfactorily relocated and reconnected even though not specifically
indicated on the drawings. All material removed which is considered salvageable by the Owner and
is not specifically designated to be reused on the drawings or not practical to be reused shall remain
in the property of the Owner and shall be neatly stockpiled in a specially designated location.

(116055)
General Electrical
26 00 10-6
3.6
TEMPORARY WIRING (Existing Electrical Service)

A.
The Contractor shall provide temporary power.
B.
Temporary power may be derived from the existing electrical service.
C.
All materials for the temporary service and wiring may be used and remain the property of the
electrical contractor.
D.
Temporary wiring materials are not to be installed as part of the permanent wiring system.
E.
Wiring need not be installed in conduit, but must be adequately installed and protected from
mechanical injury to prevent shock.
F.
Permanent wiring including feeders, panels, receptacles, etc., may be used as soon as installed.
G.
The Contractor shall bear all installation costs necessary to connect and disconnect the temporary
service.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free of waste, surplus materials, rubbish, and
debris which are caused by his employees or resulting from his work.
B.
After all equipment and fixtures have been installed and building is ready for occupancy, the
Electrical Contractor shall remove all stickers, rust stains, labels, temporary covers, plaster marks,
paint spots, etc. All foreign matter shall be blown out or flushed out of all conduits, panels, motors,
devices, switches, fixtures, etc.
C.
Identification plates and trims on all equipment shall be free of paint and polished.
D.
The Contractor shall leave the electrical portion of the work in a safe, clean and very neat condition
ready for operation.
3.8
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
The Contractor shall maintain an up-to-date set of plans and specifications on the job site. He shall
annotate all field changes, addendums, change orders, etc. on this set. Once the job is complete,
the contractor shall supply this set of drawings, updated in AutoCad (minimum Version 2009) to the
Engineer for review.
B.
The drawings shall also include as-built conditions such as equipment and device locations, routing
of service entrance and major feeders, branch circuit changes, final panelboard schedules, etc.
3.9
INSTRUCTION IN OPERATION BOOKS AND SPARE PARTS

A.
After all tests and adjustments have been made, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary qualified
personnel to place the special systems in continuous operation, during which time he shall provide
complete operating and maintenance instructions to the Owner's representative with an outline of
instructions in written form. These personnel shall reserve adequate time to instruct an Owner's
representative on proper operation (including all phases of the system and each of its component
parts).
B.
Contractor shall furnish Owner with three sets of all operating instructions, maintenance instruction
and spare parts lists of all equipment furnished under this contract. Lists shall include current unit
prices and sources of supply for each item of operable equipment.

(116055)
General Electrical
26 00 10-7
3.10
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A.
Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with
rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at
site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
B.
During the progress and after completion of the work included under this specification, the
Contractor shall make all required tests at his own expense in the presence of the Owner as
required hereinafter and by local ordinances, codes, laws, and regulations. Such tests shall be in
accordance with other sections of this division. The Owners representative shall be notified five
days in advance as to the time when such tests are to be performed that a representative of the
Architect may be present.
3.11
DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS ELECTRICAL MATERIALS - (BALLASTS AND LAMPS)
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal, storage and disposal of all electrical related
hazardous material from the work site in an EPA approved manner.
B.
All hazardous material shall be stored in a safe and secure area pending disposal. All PCB ballasts
shall be stored in metal 55 gallon drums with a bolt on lid securing ring, or in other locked metal
containers. The enclosure shall be properly labeled per EPA guidelines while awaiting shipment to
a disposal facility.
C.
Fluorescent lamps containing mercury or other hazardous materials shall be sent to an EPA
approved Recycling Center. Disposal of lamps at a standard landfill shall not be permitted.
D.
PCB ballasts shall only be disposed of by incineration at an EPA registered PCB incineration facility.
Disposal of ballasts at a standard landfill shall not be permitted.
E.
The contractor shall keep accurate records of all such hazardous materials and provide the
engineer with properly completed Certificates of Disposal, issued by the receiving disposal facility.
Certificates of disposal issued by a third party other than the final disposal facility itself will not be
acceptable. Final project payment may be withheld pending the engineer's receipt of properly
completed Certificates of Disposal.
3.12
A.
HOUSE KEEPING PADS

The Electrical Contractor is responsible for providing concrete house keeping pads for all floormounted electrical equipment (i.e. transformers, switchboards, etc.). Concrete shall be in
accordance with the concrete specification included as part of this project or as called out on the
drawings. Pads shall be 4" high (above finished floor or grade as appropriate) and shall extend 3"
beyond the equipment edge at the front, rear and sides. The corners of the pad shall have a 3/4"
chamfered edge. Pads shall be provided whether or not they are shown on the drawings.

(116055)
General Electrical
26 00 10-8
ELECTRICAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION
ITEM
26 00 10 Lighting Fixtures
26 00 10 Contactors and Time Clocks
26 00 10 Low Voltage Switching System
Panelboards, Switchboards, MCC, Disconnect
26 00 10
Devices, Transformers
Emergency Engine Generator, Transfer Switch,
26 00 10
Auxiliary Equipment
26 00 10 Fire Alarm System Components
26 00 10 Security System Components
26 00 10 Public Address System Components
26 00 10 Audio System Components
26 00 10 Boxes and Devices
26 00 10 Fuses
26 00 10 Wireway, Cable Tray, Surface Mounted Raceway
26 00 10 Lighting System Components (relays, sensors, etc.)
26 00 10 Light Dimming Equipment
26 00 10 Lamps
26 00 10 Wiring Devices Switches, Receptacles, etc
26 00 10 Device Wall Plates
26 00 10 Structured Cable System Components
26 00 10 Product Substitutions *
26 00 10 Schedule of Values
26 00 10 Record Drawings
26 00 10 Operations and Maintenance Manuals
26 08 05 Test Report
26 05 26 Inspection Wells
26 32 13 Emergency Generator Set
26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switch
28 31 05 Fire Alarm System Components
26 43 13 SPD for MDP
26 43 14 SPD for Panelboards
PD
X
X
X
SD
SUBMITTAL TYPE
OM CA WC TR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Abbreviations:
PD: Product Data
SD: Shop Drawings
OM: Operation & Maintenance Manuals
CA: Calculations
WC: Welding Certificates
TR: Test Reports
O: Other
*:
Required Prior to Bid Opening
END OF SECTION

(116055)
General Electrical
26 00 10-9
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Copper conductors.
Tap type connectors.
Compression type connectors.
Wire nut connectors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of this specification.

WIRES, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS
A.
General: All references to size in these specifications or on drawings is for copper conductors.
Provide electrical wires, cables, and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated
by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for
a complete installation, and for application indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide copper
o
o
conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 C (68 F).
B.
Aluminum conductors may not be provided in lieu of copper conductors.
C.
Building Wires: Provide factory-fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials for
applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection as
determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA
standards.
D.
Cables: Provide UL-type factory-fabricated cables of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials and
jacketing/sheathing as indicated for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper
selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, NEC and NEMA
standards.
2.3
CONNECTORS
A.
General: Provide UL-type factory-fabricated, metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials,
types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper
selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and
NEMA standards.
B.
Compression type connectors: Compression connections shall be the type requiring hydraulic
compression tools operating at a minimum pressure of 7000psi with an output pressure of no less
than 10 tons.

(116055)
Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

26 05 19-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES

A.
General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as indicated, in compliance with
applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in
accordance with recognized industry practices.
B.
The minimum size shall be 12 AWG. All wire No. 10 and smaller to be solid, all No. 8 and larger
shall be stranded.
C.
All service entrance, feeder and branch circuit wiring shall be type THHN/THWN.
D.
Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the same raceway.
E.
Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate
conductor or insulation. Use of soap will not be permitted as pulling lubricant.
F.
Insulation on conductors shall be permanently marked with wire size, insulation type, voltage range
and manufacturer's name. The insulation on conductors shall be color coded as follows:
1.
2.
120/208 volt circuit: Phase A - Black; Phase B - Red; Phase C - Blue; Neutral - White;
Ground - Green.
277/480 volt circuit: Phase A - Brown; Phase B - Orange; Phase C - Yellow; Neutral - White
w/stripe (not green); Ground - Green w/stripe.
G.
The phase conductors shall be tagged and shall remain the same throughout the circuit.
H.
Switch legs shall be color coded to distinguish them from the un-switched Phase Conductors.
I.
Switch legs occurring in the same box or enclosure shall be color coded separately.
J.
Exceptions to the color coding as listed above shall be as follows:

1.
Wiring for special systems shall be color coded or labeled as required by the manufacturer.
K.
Use pulling means including fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips that will not
damage cables or raceway.
L.
Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours, where possible. Prior approval is required for all exposed cabling.
M.
Keep conductor splices to a minimum.
N.
Install splices and taps which possess equivalent-or-better mechanical strength and insulation
ratings than conductors being spliced.
O.
Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.
P.
All splices and taps shall be made in outlet, junction and pull boxes. Splices on circuit wiring shall
be of the pigtail type using solderless connectors. Larger sizes of conductors requiring un-insulated
connectors of the bolt type shall be taped with pressure sensitive vinyl tape.
Q.
For branch circuit wiring, conductor fill per conduit run shall not contain more than 8 current carrying
wires. Conduits containing both circuit switch legs and/or traveler wires may contain more than the
number stated above, providing the conduit is of adequate size and the wire size is derated as
required by the National Electrical Code. Whenever a 120V, single phase branch circuit is over 70
feet in length, or a 277V, single phase branch circuit is over 150 feet, and the load is in excess of 50

(116055)

26 05 19-2
percent of the branch circuit protective device, the conductors shall be increased one size to the first
outlet box unless specifically noted otherwise. For special systems, conductor fill of conduit is per
manufacturers specifications furnished with each system, noted on the drawings or shall be as
required by code.
R.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements
are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL
Std. 486A and B.
S.
On occasion, the Contractor might have to route branch circuits in a non-direct path to the
equipment/device to avoid unforeseen obstacles. The contractor shall evaluate and upgrade these
branch circuits (either low voltage or 600v) as needed to minimize voltage drop. The maximum
allowable voltage drop for branch circuits is 3% and a total of 5% for both feeders and branch
circuits combined.
T.
Multi-wire branch circuits as defined by the National Electrical code (circuits with common neutral)
shall not be used. Exception: Where an equipment manufacturer requires a multi-wire branch
circuit for only one piece of utilization equipment and where all ungrounded conductors of that circuit
are opened simultaneously by the branch circuit over-current device.
3.2

A.
Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megaohm meter to determine
insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
B.
Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.
C.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to
demonstrate compliance.
3.3
ABANDONED WIRING
A.
All existing wiring and cabling left unused as a result of this project shall be removed and disposed
of. In the case of cabling, all associated fastening systems such as wire staples, tie-wraps,
electrical tape, etc. shall also be removed. All wiring/conductors in unused conveyances shall be
removed. The conveyances may or may not require removal. Refer to the drawings and other
specification sections for direction regarding unused conveyances.
B.
On rare occasions, where noted specifically on the drawings wiring may be abandoned in place.
However, the wire/cable must be tagged or otherwise identified at all of its termination and junction
points as "Abandoned in Place". The individual conductors must be insulated from contact with
other conductors and/or electrical equipment/devices.
END OF SECTION

(116055)

26 05 19-3
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings, schedules and as specified herein.
B.
Types of grounding specified in this section include the following:

1.
C.
Solid grounding
Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these
specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A.
Materials and Components:

1.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with
assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, crimp type lugs,
compression type lugs, grounding rods/electrodes, bonding jumper braids and additional
accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type of unit meets
indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are
not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry
standards for applications indicated.
B.
Conductors: Provide copper electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching
power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. All conduits shall contain a minimum of
one separate equipment grounding conductor identified and sized according to NEC. Where
Isolated Grounds (IG) are indicated on the plans provide a second ground conductor (green with
yellow stripe) for each phase conductor shown. Terminate all Isolated Ground conductors on the
appropriate Isolated Ground Bus.
C.
Bonding Jumper Braids: Copper braided tape, constructed of 30-gage bare copper wires and
properly sized for indicated applications.
D.
Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical connectors, terminals, lugs and clamps as
recommended by connector, terminal and clamp manufacturers for indicated applications.
E.
Ground Rods:
1.
2.
Standard Ground Rods: Steel with copper welded exterior, 3/4" dia. x 10' (Unless otherwise
noted).
Chemically Enhanced Ground Rods: A self contained, electrolytically enhanced grounding
rod shall be provided on the drawings where indicated. The rod shall be made of 2" dia.
hollow copper tube with a wall thickness of not less than .079". The tube shall be
permanently capped at the top and bottom and shall have breather holes for electrolyte
drainage into the surrounding soil. The rod shall be a minimum of 10 feet long and shall have
a #4/0 bare copper conductor exothermically welded to the side for connection to the system.
The rod shall be U.L. Listed for a minimum of 5 years and shall be 100% self

(116055)
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

26 05 26-1
activated/sealed and maintenance free. Each chemical rod shall be equipped with an
inspection well and enhanced backfill material such as Bentonite.
F.
EUFER Ground:
1.
G.
Concrete Encased Electrode, located within and near the bottom of the foundation, encased
with a minimum of 2" of concrete.
a.
Where foundation re-enforcing bars are available for use (20' or more of " diameter
rebar), provide bare copper conductor (size as shown on the drawings) for the
connection to the equipment. Connection of the copper conductor to the rebar shall
be by exothermic weld or approved compression type fitting listed for the purpose.
Provide " or " PVC conduit sleeve as applicable for conductor transition out of the
concrete. All re-enforcing bars along the 20' length shall be tied together via wire ties.
b.
Where foundation re-enforcing bars are not available for use, provide 20' of #4/0 bare
copper laid in the bottom of the foundation (encased by a minimum of 2" of concrete).
Extend the #4/0 conductor up through the foundation for connection to equipment.
Provide " PVC conduit sleeve as applicable for conductor transition out of the
concrete.
Inspection Wells:
1.
2.
Standard Well: The standard inspection well shall be constructed of poly plastic material and
shall be rated for indoor and outdoor use. The assembly shall be able to withstand light
traffic and the cover shall be bolted in place. The cover shall be vented and labeled as
grounding. The assembly shall be mounted flush with the finished grade/material. The
assembly shall be at least 10" deep and 9" wide.
Traffic Rated Well: The traffic rated inspection well shall be constructed of concrete material
and shall be rated for outdoor use. The assembly shall be able to withstand light vehicle
traffic and the cover shall be bolted in place. The cover shall be constructed of steel, vented
and labeled as grounding. The assembly shall be mounted flush with the finished
grade/material. The assembly shall be at least 10" deep and 9" wide.
H.
Ground Bar: Free-standing ground bars shall be constructed of solid copper 1/4" thick. The bars
shall be 4" wide, 20" long and shall have threaded holes for cable connections. The ground bar
shall be equipped with steel mounting brackets and dielectric insulators that isolate the mounting
system from the grounding bar.
I.
Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable

insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories
manufacturers for type of services indicated.
J.
Exothermic Welded Connections: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality
of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work. Provide welded connections where
grounding conductors connect to underground rods, electrodes, cables and equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Installer must examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding connections are to be
made and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
owners representative.

(116055)

26 05 26-2
3.2
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

A.
General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions
of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions.
B.
The equipment grounding conductor shall be connected directly to the equipment grounding screw
provided on receptacles.
C.
At switch outlets, where self-grounding type switches are installed in metal boxes, the equipment
grounding conductor shall be connected directly to the metal box.
D.
Where switches installed in non-metallic boxes have metallic cover plates or screws, provide
switches with green hexagonal equipment ground screw and connect to the equipment grounding
conductor.
E.
Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding
system with other work.
F.
Weld grounding conductors to underground grounding rods/electrodes. (Welds that are puffed up
or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable).
G.
Install bonding jumpers with ground clamps on water meter piping to electrically bypass water
meters.
H.
Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces to ensure electrical
conductivity and circuit integrity.
I.
Install all ground rods (standard or chemical) in an enhanced backfill material such as Bentonite.
Provide a minimum of 4" around the entire rod.
J.
Rods installed in electrical rooms and communication rooms shall be provided with inspection wells.
K.
The secondary of all interior transformers shall be bonded to a proven ground source.
3.3

A.
Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding systems, test ground resistance with ground
resistance tester. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 10 ohms, take appropriate action
to reduce resistance to 10 ohms, or less. If necessary drive additional ground rods or provide
chemically enhance rods, then connect them together with #4/0 bare copper grounding wire. Retest
to demonstrate compliance. Coordinate any rework required with the engineer prior to beginning
work.
END OF SECTION

(116055)

26 05 26-3
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of
hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings.
1.
Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional specific support requirements that may be
applicable to specific items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2

COATINGS
A.
2.3
Coatings: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with
treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent
material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized.
MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers,
ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps.
B.
Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows:

1.
2.
3.
Expansion Anchors: Lead, carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. Plastic expansion anchors
(for conduit 1" and smaller only).
Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.
Power-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for the intended
service.
C.
Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies

suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct
seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure
rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.
D.
Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and
insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of
malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

(116055)
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

26 05 29-1
E.
2.4
U-Channel Systems: 16-gage steel channels, with 9/16-inch diameter holes, at a minimum of 8
inches on center in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match the Uchannel and are of the same manufacture.
FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
General: Shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel

components.
B.
Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect
with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.
C.
Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

1.
Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal: round tube closed with snap lock joint,
welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage
metal for sleeve diameter noted:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
3 inch and smaller:

4 inch to 6-inch:
Over 6 inch:
20-gage.
16-gage.
14-gage.
Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.

Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance
with NEC requirements.
B.
Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installations.
C.
Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports.

Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a
safety factor of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less
than 200 lbs, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance
in the strength of each support.
Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceways hangers and riser clamps as necessary to
support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for
hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers.
Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may
be used in lieu of hangers only for 1-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and
receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel
fasteners, use 1/4-inch diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are
specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing.
Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 foot of an unsupported box and access
fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted where box
or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with
chase nipples or threadless box connectors.
In vertical runs, arrange supports so that loads produced by the weight of the raceway and
the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on
raceway terminals.

(116055)

26 05 29-2
D.
Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors.
E.
Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the

same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for
mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices.
F.
Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers.
G.
Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire rated floors and walls for raceways and
cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated-wall or floor construction, apply UL-listed fire
stopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables.
H.
Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below
grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to
form watertight seals.
I.
Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware
securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays,
busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components
in accordance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow
masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and
machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs
driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of
expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items
other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use
sheet metal screws.
Holes cut to depths of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depths of
more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not
used.
Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test
load. Use vibration and shock-resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.
END OF SECTION

(116055)

26 05 29-3
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
All wiring shall be installed in continuous raceways as specified herein except where specifically
noted otherwise.
B.
The extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules
and shall comply with the latest requirements of the NEC.
C.
Types of raceways in this section include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Electrical metallic tubing.

Flexible metal conduit.
Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.
Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
Surface Mounted Raceways (SMR)
Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Outlet boxes.
Junction boxes.
Pull boxes.
Floor boxes.
Bushings.
Lock nuts.
Knockout closures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A.
General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall
thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide
proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable
portions of NEC for raceways.
B.
Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: Provide rigid steel, zinc-coated, threaded type conforming to
FS WW-C-581, ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Provide zinc coating fused to inside and outside walls.
1.
2.
C.
Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: Rigid metal conduits shall have threaded couplings when
installed in concrete or direct burial in the ground. Other installations in dry locations may be
thread less rigid fittings.
PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: Provide rigid steel zinc-coated with additional
external coating of PVC conforming to ANSI C80.1 and NEMA RN 1.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide flexible metal conduit conforming to FS WW-C-566 and UL 1.
Formed from continuous lengths of spirally wound, interlocked zinc-coated strip steel.

(116055)
Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

26 05 33-1
1.
Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide conduit fittings for use with flexible steel conduit of
threadless hinged clamp type.
a.
b.
D.
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit; construct of single
strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel; galvanized inside and outside;
coat with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
1.
E.
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G. Provide
cadmium plated, malleable iron fittings with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene
gasket sealing rings, with insulated throat.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Provide electrical metallic tubing conforming to FS WW-C-563,
ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
1.
F.
2.2
Straight Terminal Connectors: One piece body, female end with clamp and deep
slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and male threaded end provided with
locknut.
o
o
45 or 90 Terminal Angle Connectors: Two-piece body construction with removable
upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing
conduit, and male threaded end provided with locknut.
EMT Fittings: Fittings for EMT shall be steel and may be of the screw or compression type
except that in poured concrete the screw type is not acceptable. All EMT connectors shall be
of the insulated throat type. Cast or indenter fittings are not acceptable.
Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies of types, shapes and sizes as
required to fulfill the job requirements and NEC requirements. Construct conduit bodies with
threaded-conduit-entrance ends, removable covers, either cast or of galvanized steel, and
corrosion-resistant screws.
WIREWAYS
A.
General: Provide electrical wireway of types, grades, sizes, and number of channels for each
type of service as indicated. Provide complete assembly of raceway including, but not limited to,
couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapter, hold down straps, end caps, and other
components and accessories as required for a complete system.
B.
Lay-in Wireway: Provide lay-in wireway with hinged covers, in accordance with UL 870. Include
required lengths, connectors, and fittings. Select units to allow fastening hinged cover closed
without use of parts other than standard lengths, fittings and connectors. Construct units to be
capable of sealing cover in closed position with sealing wire. Provide wireway with knockouts.
1.
2.
Connectors: Provide wireway connectors suitable for "lay-in" conductors, with connector
covers permanently attached such that removal is not necessary to utilize the lay-in feature.
Finish: Protect sheet metal parts with rust inhibiting coating and baked enamel finish. Plate
finish hardware to prevent corrosion. Protect screws installed toward inside of wireway with
spring nuts to prevent wire insulation damage.
C.
Rain tight Wireway: Rain tight lay-in wireway with hinged covers, in accordance with UL 870 and
with components UL-listed, including lengths, connectors and fittings. Design units to allow
fastening hinged cover closed without use of parts other than standard lengths, fittings and
connectors. Construct units to be capable of sealing cover in closed position with sealing wire.
Provide wireway units with knockouts only in bottom of troughs.
D.
Rain tight Troughs: Troughs shall be in accordance with UL 870, with components UL-listed.

(116055)

26 05 33-2
1.
2.
2.3
Construction: 16-gage galvanized sheet metal parts for 4" x 4" to 6" x 6" sections, and
14-gage parts for 8" x 8" and larger sections. Provide knockouts only in bottom of troughs,
with suitable adapters to facilitate attaching to other NEMA 3R enclosures. Do not use
gasketing that can rip or tear during installation, or would compromise rain tight capability of
the trough. Do not use cover screws that will protrude into the trough area and damage wire
insulation.
Finish: Provide 14-gage and 16-gage galvanized sheet metal parts with corrosion-resistant
phosphate primer and baked enamel finish. Plate hardware to prevent corrosion.
SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAYS (SMR)

A.
Type 1 Raceway: Multi-outlet assembly for prewired outlets, lengths as indicated. Provide 3-wire,
single circuit with outlets on [6", 12", 18"] centers. Provide green covered ground as third wire.
System specified is similar to "Wiremold 2400-GB series".
B.
Type 2 Raceway: Multi-outlet assembly for prewired outlets, lengths as indicated. Provide 4-wire,
double circuit with outlets on [12", 18"] centers. Provide green covered ground as fourth wire.
System specified is similar to "Wiremold 2400-GBA series".
C.
Type 3 Raceway: Two-piece type with single compartment, length as indicated. Raceway shall
be nominally 2-3/4"h x 1-17/32"d with flush, snap-on cover. Install devices as indicated in
raceway. Provide all necessary boxes, covers, end fittings, elbows, couplings, tees, wall box
connectors, device plates, etc. as required to provide a complete surface raceway system.
Product specified is similar to "Wiremold 3000 series".
D.
Type 4 Raceway: Two-piece type, divided for power and communication use, lengths as
indicated. Raceway shall be nominally 4-3/4"H x 1-3/4"D with 2, 2-3/8" compartments. Provide
all necessary boxes, covers, end fittings, elbows, couplings, tees, wall box connectors, device
plates, etc. as required to provide a complete surface raceway system. Product specified is
similar to "Wiremold 4000 series".
E.
Type 5 Raceway: Surface mounted one piece type for power or communications use, lengths as
indicated. Raceway shall be nominally 3/4"h x 21/32"w. Provide all necessary boxes, covers,
end fittings, elbows, couplings, tees, wall box connectors, device plates, etc. as required to
provide a complete surface raceway system. Product specified is similar to "Wiremold 700
series".
F.
Type 6 Raceway: Two-piece type, divided for power and communication use, length as indicated.
Raceway shall be nominally 4-3/4"h x 3-9/16"d with flush, snap-on cover. Install devices as
indicated in raceway. Provide all necessary boxes, covers, end fittings, elbows, couplings, tees,
wall box connectors, device plates, etc. as required to provide a complete surface raceway
system. Product specified is similar to "Wiremold 6000 series".
G.
Boxes for Surface Raceways: Designed, manufactured and supplied by raceway manufacturer
for use with specified raceway.
H.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide surface mounted raceways of

one of the following:
1.
Wiremold Company
2.
Panduit Company

(116055)

26 05 33-3
2.4
BOXES
A.
Outlet Boxes: Conform to UL 514A, "Metallic Outlet Boxes, Electrical," and UL 514B, "Fittings for
Conduit and Outlet Boxes." Boxes shall be of type, shape, size, and depth to suit each location
and application.
1.
Conform to NEMA OS 1, "Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box
Supports." Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes and
accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps, cable clamps,
exterior rings and fixture studs.
B.
Rain-tight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal rain-tight outlet wiring boxes, of
types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening
electrical conduit, cast-metal face plates with spring-hinged watertight caps suitably configured
for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant plugs and fasteners.
C.
Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with
screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation;
with welded seams and equipped with steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.
D.
Bushings, Knockout Closures and Lock nuts: Provide corrosion-resistant box knockout closures,
conduit lock nuts and conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective
installation requirements and applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS
A.
General: Install raceways as indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and in compliance with NEC, and NECA's "Standards of Installation". Install units
plumb and level, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B.
Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, boxes, and panel work, as necessary to
interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other work.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS
A.
General: All conduits shall be concealed unless noted otherwise. Install concealed conduits
either in walls (stud walls, masonry walls, precast walls, etc), slabs, or above hung/suspended
ceilings. In existing work where conduits can not be concealed in finished areas, surface metal
raceways shall be used, but prior approval is required.
1.
2.
3.
Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways for conductors to
form continuous electrical conductor. Connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to
provide electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly.
Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound
before assembling.
Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split couplings,
and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular
application. Install expansion fittings in raceways every 200' of linear run or wherever
structural expansion joints are crossed.

(116055)

26 05 33-4
4.
B.
Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated unit furnished by supplier. Set conduit
and boxes for connection to units only after receiving review of dimensions and after
checking location with other trades.
Conduit Installation: Provide rigid conduit where embedded in concrete on or below grade, in
direct contact with earth or fill below slab, wet locations, or installed outdoors. Follow minimum
requirements in other areas as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) conduit in spaces where subject to mechanical injury and
exposed below 4'-0" height in mechanical equipment rooms and penthouses. Other areas
include warehouse spaces where exposed below 18'-0" height, on floors of crawl spaces, and
any other locations subject to mechanical injury.
Where acceptable to all authorities having jurisdiction, intermediate metal conduit may be
used in lieu of rigid steel conduit in non-hazardous locations when in compliance with NEC.
Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit and fittings where installed in corrosive atmosphere.
Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit.
Use steel zinc-coated EMT for raceway systems except as specifically specified previously,
where not allowed by NEC or noted on drawings. Additionally EMT shall not be acceptable
below grade, in or under slabs on grade or in wet locations.
Use liquid-tight flexible conduit in movable partitions and in systems furniture connections.
Use flexible metal conduit from outlet boxes to recessed lighting fixtures above accessible
ceilings. Use liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for the final 24" of connection to motors, or
control items subject to movement or vibration.
Use liquid-tight flexible conduit where subjected to one or more of the following conditions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Exterior location.
Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
Pump motors.
Corrosive atmosphere.
Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.
C.
Stub-up Connections: When conduit stub-ups are exterior or exposed in the interior such as in a
mechanical or electrical room, the stub up shall be Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS). Extend
conduits through concrete floor and provide a threaded coupling for conduit extension or
connection to equipment. Extend conduit to equipment with RGS conduit or EMT as applicable.
Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor when appropriate and
permitted by this specification. Where equipment connections are not made under this contract,
provide a threaded plug or cap to protect the integrity of the conveyance.
D.
Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of
bends is not visible above the finished slab.
E.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use no. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic
line having not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each
end of the pull wire.
F.
Cut conduits straight, properly ream, and cut threads for heavy wall conduit deep and clean. Use
temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
G.
Field-bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort nor vary internal
diameter.
H.
Size conduits to meet NEC requirements and as shown on drawings or specified herein, except
no conduit smaller than 3/4 inch shall be embedded in or below concrete or in masonry walls.

(116055)

26 05 33-5
I.
Fasten rigid conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures with locknuts inside and outside
enclosure or with threadless rigid box connectors and terminate with bushing.
J.
Conduit terminations in wet locations shall be of the threaded hub type or other sealing type
fittings UL listed for use in wet locations.
K.
Conduits are not to cross vertical or horizontal openings such as pipe shafts, elevator shafts,
ventilating duct openings, etc.
L.
Keep conduits a minimum distance of 6" from parallel runs of flues, hot water pipes or other
sources of heat. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam
piping.
M.
Conduit shall be properly supported as specified herein and as required by NEC.
N.
Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.
O.
Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. Where required, use
3-piece union or split coupling.
P.
Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within

raceways.
Q.
Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate
fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound.
For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a
finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following
points and elsewhere as indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations.

Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of
refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces.
Where required by the NEC.
R.
Openings around electrical penetrations through fire-resistant-rated walls, partitions, floors, or

ceilings shall be fire stopped using approved methods to maintain the fire resistance rating.
S.
Provide sleeves for conduits passing through foundation or other load bearing walls.
T.
Conduits installed underground which extend through the foundation walls shall be sealed to
prevent the entrance of moisture through the foundation walls. All conduit extending through the
exterior walls of a building in areas below grade shall be provided with a hydrostatic seal such as
Link Seal or equal.
U.
Concealed Conduits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Conduits in finished areas shall be installed concealed.

Metallic raceways installed underground or in floors below grade, or outside are to have
conduit threads painted with corrosion inhibiting compound before couplings are assembled.
Draw up coupling and conduit sufficiently tight to ensure watertightness.
For floors-on-grade, install conduits under concrete slabs.
Install underground conduits minimum of 24" below finished grade.
Rigid steel conduit buried in direct contact with the earth shall be taped with an approved
pipeline tape or coated with an asphaltum base paint prior to installation. All scratches shall
be re-taped or repainted after installation before backfilling. Tape shall overlap a minimum of
1/4" and shall be two layers thick.

(116055)

26 05 33-6
V.
Conduits in Concrete Slabs:

1.
2.
3.
Place conduits between bottom reinforcing steel and top reinforcing steel.
Place conduits either parallel, or at 90 degrees, to main reinforcing steel.
Separate conduits by not less than diameter of largest conduit to ensure proper concrete
bond.
W.
Install conduits as not to damage or run through structural members. Avoid horizontal or cross
runs in building partitions or side walls.
X.
Exposed Conduits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Y.
Conduit Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Z.
Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with sharp edge for digging into
metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening.
Plastic insulating bushings for terminating rigid conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are to have
ribbed sides with smooth upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation.
Install metallic insulated type bushings for terminating rigid conduits 1-1/4" and larger.
Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides. Upper edge to have phenolic insulating
ring molded into bushing.
Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split couplings, and
plugs to be specifically designed for their particular application.
Under Roof Decking:
1.
3.3
In unfinished areas such as janitor closets, storage, mechanical equipment rooms, etc.,
conduit may be exposed. Prior permission shall be first obtained from the Architect. All
exposed conduit shall be installed in a neat manner following the building lines. Horizontal
runs shall be close to the ceiling and shall be installed above mechanical piping as much as
possible. Single hung conduits shall be supported with strap or rod hangers, wire is not an
acceptable hanger. Multiple hung conduits shall be strapped to the channel to hold it in
place.
Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit systems neatly, parallel with,
or at right angles to walls of building.
Install exposed conduit work as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or ventilation ducts
or outlets.
Support exposed conduits by use of hangers, clamps, or clips. Support conduits on each
side of bends and on spacing not to exceed the following: up to 1": 6'-0"; 1-1/4" and over:
8'-0".
Run conduits for outlets on waterproof walls exposed. Set anchors for supporting conduit on
waterproof wall in waterproof cement.
Above requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits installed in space above
hung ceilings, and in crawl spaces except that spacing of supports for conduits up to 1" shall
not exceed 8'-0".
Conduit shall not be installed directly under roof decking or on top of joists below the decking.
Provide a minimum of 2" of separation between the conduit and the bottom of the roof
decking to prevent roof fasteners from damaging the conveyances.
INSTALLATION OF SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS

A.
General: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures and raceways to be electrically continuous.

Connect electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity and
rigid mechanical assembly.

(116055)

26 05 33-7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis.

Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound
before assembling.
Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion joints are crossed.
Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings, supplied by raceway
manufacturer. No field bends of two-piece type raceway sections will be permitted.
Field bends of single piece raceway shall be permitted for small offsets only where the use of
fittings supplied by the manufacturer is not possible. Field-bend raceway with benders
designed for purpose so as not to distort nor vary internal diameter of raceway. Raceway
shall be installed so as to avoid field-bends wherever possible.
Properly support and anchor raceways along entire length by structural materials. Raceways
are not to span any space unsupported.
Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull or device boxes are
required. Standard electrical "handy" boxes, etc. shall not be permitted for use with surface
raceway installations.
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS

A.
General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
B.
Surface mounted device boxes in unfinished areas shall be a minimum of 4 inches square,
knockout type. Surface mounted boxes in finished and exterior areas, shall be cast metal,
threaded hub similar to Bell boxes.
C.
Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring devices, and
raceway installation work.
D.
Provide weather-tight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.
E.
Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.
F.
Install electrical boxes in those locations that insure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical
wiring. Junction boxes shall not be installed above non-accessible ceilings.
G.
Avoid installing boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 24" separation.
H.
Do not install aluminum products in concrete.
I.
Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.
J.
Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material.
K.
Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in
difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surfaces.
L.
Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, structural surfaces or solidly embed
electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Box support shall be independent of conduit.
M.
Provide electrical connections for installed boxes.
N.
Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage.

(116055)

26 05 33-8
3.5
POSITION OF OUTLETS
A.
The Electrical Contractor shall consult with the Mechanical and General Contractor prior to
rough-in outlets and shall set boxes to avoid interference with equipment installation in walls or
ceilings.
B.
Outlets shall be centered with respect to paneling, trim, furring, etc. Outlets that are improperly
located shall be corrected at Contractor's expenses. Outlets shall be set plumb and secured
firmly in place. The face of box or plaster ring shall extend to the finished surface (wall, ceiling or
floor).
C.
Washers or bushings shall be installed between recessed box and device strap to make a flush
rigid installation of the device installed.
D.
The following mounting height schedule is included to assist the Contractor in estimating. All
device locations shall be coordinated with Architectural details and elevations. Exact heights
shall be obtained from the project superintendent at the time of installation or taken from
drawings as shown thereon. Heights of device boxes are noted, in inches, from the finished floor
to the top of the device.
Light Switches
Standard Receptacles
(Unless otherwise indicated)
Receptacles
In Janitors Closet
Equipment Room,
Storage Rooms,
Unfinished Utilitarian Areas
Weatherproof (Exterior)
At Counters (Unless otherwise
indicated) mounted horizontally
Wall or ceiling mounted TV
Fire Alarm Visual Units
48"
20
48
48
48
48"
20"
Fire Alarm Audible/Visual Units

Fire Alarm Audible Units
Clocks, P.A. Speakers, Etc.
(Unless otherwise indicated)
Wall mounted phones, Intercom stations, etc.
Speaker Controls
Thermostats, Starters, Etc.
Telecommunication outlets
Cable TV outlets
Wall or ceiling mounted
All others
Fire Alarm Manual Pull Stations
Wall mounted system furniture connections
46"
72
Top of unit 6" below
ceiling or 84"
(whichever is lower)
ceiling or 84"
ceiling or 94"
ceiling or 96"
48"
48"
20
72 *
20
48
8
* Coordinate receptacle height to match

(116055)

26 05 33-9
3.6
GROUNDING
A.
Upon completion of installation work, ground electrical boxes as required by NEC and other
Division-26 sections.
END OF SECTION

(116055)

26 05 33-10
SECTION 26 05 34
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are
defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems which are intended to carry but not
utilize electric energy.
B.
Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Receptacles
Ground-fault circuit interrupters
Switches
Wall plates
Dimmers
Plugs and connectors
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2

FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES
A.
General: Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices in types, colors, and electrical ratings for
applications indicated and which comply with NEMA Standards Pub/No. WD 1. Provide gray color
devices except as otherwise indicated; color selection to be verified by Contractor with
Architect/Engineer. All devices shall be federal specification grade unless otherwise noted. Pigtail
receptacles with a connector assembly built into the back of the device and a separate
polycarbonate connector housing with wire leads are acceptable.
B.
Receptacles
1.
2.
3.
Heavy-Duty Simplex: Provide single heavy-duty self-grounding type receptacles, 2-pole,

3-wire, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, 20-amperes, 125 volts, with metal
plaster ears; design for side and back wiring with spring loaded, screw activated pressure
plate, with NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.
Heavy-Duty Duplex: Provide heavy-duty self-grounding type duplex receptacles, 2-pole,
3-wire, 20-amperes, 125-volts, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, metal plaster
ears, design for side and back wiring with screw activated pressure plate, with NEMA
configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.
Ground-Fault Interrupters: Provide "feed-thru" type ground-fault circuit interrupters, with
heavy-duty duplex receptacles, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on
single circuit, and of being installed in a 2-3/4" deep outlet box without adapter, grounding
type UL-rated Class A, Group 1, rated 20-amperes, 120-volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state
ground-fault sensing and signaling; with 5 milliamperes ground-fault trip level; equip with
NEMA configuration 5-20R. GFCI Devices used for exterior applications must be Weather
Resistant (WR) rated and be provided with an In Use Cover.

(116055)
Wiring Devices
26 05 34 - 1
4.
Tamper Resistant Duplex Receptacles (TR):

Tamper Resistant Receptacles shall have:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
C.
Plugs and Connectors

1.
D.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Plugs and Connectors: Provide plugs and connectors with required amperage ratings,
voltage ratings and NEMA configurations, which are designed to suit the atmospheric
conditions of the equipment surroundings.
Switches
1.
E.
Tamper resistant dual mechanism shutter system to help prevent insertion of foreign
objects.
Heavy-duty brass, one-piece mounting strap with integral ground.
One-piece, nickel-plated, triple-wipe power contacts for lasting retention.
Strap tabs wrap around and lock down on face to prevent strap from separating from
face and back body.
Impact-resistant nylon face and back body.
Two drive screws anchor strap to back body and face.
External screw-pressure-plate back wire clamp on ground terminal for faster, easier
installation.
External screw-pressure-plate back wire clamps with #10 brass terminal screws for
visual assurance of a good connection.
Auto ground clip assures positive ground.
The tamper resistant receptacle shall meet the latest version of the following
standards:
1)
FSUL WC 596
2)
ANSI/IEEE 62.41
3)
CSA TIL #1-11B/Standard C22.2 #42.
4)
Federal Specification WC 896
General: Switches shall be provided as specified in this section. Additional features such as
key operator, rocker and lighted toggle shall be provided where indicated on the drawings.
All switches shall be Federal Specification Grade (WC896).
Single-Pole: Provide heavy-duty flush single-pole AC quiet, self-grounding type switches,
20-amperes, 120-277 volts, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster
ears, toggle switch handle, and side-wired screw terminals.
Three Way: Provide heavy-duty flush 3-way AC quiet, self-grounding type switches,
ears, toggle switch handles, and side-wired screw terminals.
Four Way: Provide heavy-duty flush 4-way AC quiet, self-grounding type switches,
ears, toggle switch handles, and side-wired screw terminals.
Lamp Dimmers: Provide dimmer controls for the applicable fixture type; voltage and wattage as
indicated (or sized for load if not indicated), with continuously adjustable vertical slide control and/or
push-button with air gap ON-OFF switch. Equip with electromagnetic filters to eliminate noise/RF
interference. All dimmers shall meet U.L. 20 and be appropriately marked. Verify mounting
requirements with dimmer manufacturer and provide device box(es) accordingly. Coordinate
florescent lamp and LED dimmers with the selected/specified dimming ballasts and/or driver to
ensure compatibility. Characteristics and aesthetics of the dimmers shall the other devices in the
room.
WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES
A.
Wall plates: Provide Wall plates for single and combination wiring devices of types, sizes, and with
ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which
attached. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices. The screw heads colored to

(116055)
Wiring Devices
26 05 34 - 2
match finish of plates. Wall plates colored to match wiring devices except as noted below. Provide
plates possessing the following additional construction features:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Finished Areas
Material and Finish:
0.04" thick, type 302 satin finished

stainless steel.
Unfinished Areas
Material and Finish:
Steel plate, galvanized.
Surface mounted boxes in unfinished areas shall be furnished with 4" square raised covers,
with openings to fit device or devices to be installed.
Furnish outdoor weatherproof receptacles with spring loaded, cast type steel covers and an "in-use"
protective cover for the installation of cords.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES

A.
Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable
requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized
industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
B.
Provide tamper resistant receptacles in all pediatric locations. Provide tamper resistant receptacles,
child care facilities and pre-school/kindergarten facilities where children are normally present
throughout the day.
C.
Provide tamper resistant receptacles in all residential applications as required by the NEC.
D.
Provide arc-fault receptacles in all all residential applications as required by the NEC.
E.
Coordinate with other work including painting, electrical boxes and wiring work as necessary to
interface installation of wiring devices with other work.
F.
Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt,
and debris.
G.
Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
H.
Install wall plates after painting work is completed.
I.
Connections of wire to devices shall be screw tightened. Connections using only spring pressure
are not acceptable.
J.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torque
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torque
specified in UL Stds 486A and B. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.
K.
All switches and receptacles with exposed terminals shall be wrapped with insulating tape equal to
Scotch No. 33 such that no live parts are left exposed.
3.2
PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES

A.
Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious
use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have
been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs and those which are not clean
and free from paint, dirt and debris.

(116055)
Wiring Devices
26 05 34 - 3
3.3
GROUNDING
A.
Provide equipment grounding connections for all wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated.
Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure
permanent and effective grounds.
B.
Where IG type devices are shown provide two ground wires: 1) green wire, equipment ground
bonded to the device box and 2) green wire with yellow stripe, isolated ground connected to the
ground terminal on the receptacle.
3.4
TESTING
A.
Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity and short-circuits. Ensure proper
polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to
demonstrate compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION

(116055)
Wiring Devices
26 05 34 - 4
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Extent of electrical identification is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Buried cable warnings

Electrical power, control and communication conductors
Operational instructions and warnings
Danger signs
Equipment/system identification signs
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories

and types required for each application. Where more than one type is specified for an application
the selection is Installer's option, but a single selection shall be provided for each application.
B.
Plasticized Tags:
1.
C.
General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention and

operational tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately
3-1/4" x 5-5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed
wording including large-size primary working, e.g.: DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT
OPERATE.
Self-Adhesive Plastic Signs:

1.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard, self-adhesive or pressure-sensitive, pre-printed,

flexible vinyl signs for operational instructions or warnings of sizes suitable for application
areas and adequate for visibility, with proper wording for each application, e.g.: 208V,
EXHAUST FAN, RECTIFIER.
a.
D.
Baked Enamel Danger Signs:

1.
E.
Colors: Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide

orange signs with black lettering.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard "DANGER" signs of baked enamel finish on

20-gage steel of standard red, black and white graphics. Provide 14" x 10" size except where
10" x 7" is the largest size which can be applied. Provide standard verbiage such as HIGH
VOLTAGE, KEEP AWAY, BURIED CABLE, DO NOT TOUCH SWITCH, etc.
Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs:

1.
General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in
sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and

(116055)
Electrical Identification for Electrical Systems

26 05 53-1
wording indicated, black face and white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated,
punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of
substrate.
a.
b.
F.
Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker:

1.
2.2
Thickness: 1/16", for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" length; 1/8" for larger units.
Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent
adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.
General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape

with metallic tracing wire/tape not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing
which most accurately indicates type of service or buried cable.
LETTERING AND GRAPHICS

A.
General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical identification
work with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering
and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as
required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 pertaining to minimum sizes for letters and numbers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A.
General Installation Requirements:

1.
2.
3.
B.
Operational Identification and Warnings:

1.
C.
Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, and requirements of NEC.
Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install
identification after completion of painting.
Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for
identification of electrical work.
General: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and electrically connected mechanical systems and
general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by
unauthorized personnel, install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification,
instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of
electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide
plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes.
Danger Signs:
1.
General: In addition to installation of danger signs required by Governing regulations and

authorities, install appropriate danger signs at locations indicated and at locations subsequently identified by Installer of electrical work as constituting similar dangers for persons
in or about project.
a.
b.
High Voltage: Install danger signs wherever it is possible, under any circumstances,
for persons to come into contact with electrical power of voltages higher than 250
volts.
Critical Switches/Controls: Install danger signs on switches and similar controls,
regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent operation

(116055)

26 05 53-2
(by anyone) could result in significant danger to persons, or damage to or loss of

property where instructed by Architect.
D.
Equipment/System Identification:
1.
General: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in
building including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/
control/signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or
signal system. Signs for disconnect switches, motor starters, contactors, and similar
equipment shall indicate the load served. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line
of text, 3/4" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), white
lettering in black field. Lettering for emergency power system components shall be white
lettering in red field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract
documents and shop drawings. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of
electrical work.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures

Access panels and doors to electrical facilities
Electrical switchgear (Unit and individual breaker/switches)
Disconnect switches
Motor control centers and individual cubicles
Electronics racks
Motor starters
Contactors
Power transfer equipment
Transformers
Telephone equipment
Clock/program master equipment
Public address equipment
CATV equipment
Fire alarm panels, devices and enclosures
Security panels, racks, devices and enclosures
Pull boxes and enclosures larger than 6" x 6"
Switches and receptacles *
* Labels for individual devices shall be clear adhesive (Kroy machine type) with black
lettering (3/16" high) located near the bottom of the plate. Label switches and
receptacles with the panel and circuit number feeding the device. Label all Fire Alarm
and Security devices in accordance with the appropriate Fire Alarm and Security
specification. Device plates for switches and receptacles shall also be labeled on
back side of plate using permanent black ink.
2.
E.
Underground Cable and Conveyance Identification:

1.
2.
F.
Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best
convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or
cannot penetrate substrate.
General: During the installation of buried electrical cable and/or conveyances (power and
signal), install continuous underground-type plastic line marker with tracing wire/tape, located
directly over buried line at 6" to 8" below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are
buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16", install a single line
marker.
Install line marker for every buried cable, regardless of whether direct buried or protected in
conduit.
Cable/Conductor Identification:

(116055)

26 05 53-3
1.
General: Apply cable/conductor identification in each box/enclosure/cabinet, except where

another form of identification (such as color-coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and
similar previously established identification for project electrical work.
END OF SECTION

(116055)

26 05 53-4
SECTION 26 24 13
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Extent of switchboard work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of switchboards specified in this section include the following:

1.
Fusible Switch Switchboard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide switchboards of one of the

following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
General Electric Co.

Siemens.
Square D Co.
Cutler Hammer Co,
All switchboards and panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer. The Contractor shall verify
that the size of the equipment supplied by the selected manufacturer does not exceed the available
mounting space.
EQUIPMENT SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide switchboards and ancillary components of types,
sizes, characteristics, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design,
materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as
required for complete installation.
B.
Switchboards: Provide factory- assembled, dead-front, metal-enclosed, self-supporting secondary

power switchboards, of types, sizes and electrical ratings and characteristics indicated; consisting of
panel (vertical) units, and containing fusible switch assemblies of quantities, ratings and types
indicated. Provide tin plated copper or silver plated copper main bus and connections to switching
devices and circuit- breaker branches, with main bus and tap connections bolted tightly according to
manufacturer's torquing requirements for maximum conductivity. The current density of the bus
shall not exceed 750 amperes per square inch cross-section for aluminum or 1000 amperes per
square inch cross-section for copper. Brace bus for short-circuit stresses up to 65,000 amperes
symmetrical or as indicated on the drawings, which ever is higher. Provide accessibility of line and
load terminations from front of switchboard. Prime and coat switchboard with manufacturer's
standard finish and color. Equip units with built-in lifting eyes and yokes; and provide individual
panel (vertical) units, suitable for bolting together at project site. All switchboards sections shall be
fully bussed, both horizontally and vertically. Bussing shall be configured to accommodate the
addition of future devices and sections. Construct switchboard units for the following environment:
1.
Installation: Indoors, NEMA Type 1.

(116055)
Switchboards
26 24 13-1
C.
Enclosures: Construct dead-front switchboards, suitable for floor mounting, with front cabling/wiring
accessibility, and conduit accessibility as indicated. Provide welded steel channel framework; hinge
wireway front covers to permit ready access to branch circuit load side terminals. Coat enclosures
with manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish. Each section shall be a maximum of the
existing deep and wide. Minimum depth shall be 24".
1.
A ground bus shall be furnished secured to each vertical section structure, and shall extend
the entire length of the switchboard.
D.
Fusible Branch Switches: The fusible switch branches shall be quick-make, quick-break and
suitable for use on the service as described for the sizes as shown on the associated drawings.
The units shall be listed and approved by Underwriters' Laboratories for general service entrance
use and, where applicable, shall be dual horsepower rated for both standard one time or dual
element fuses. The fusible switches shall be group mounted in panel type construction. Each
switch is to be enclosed in a separate steel enclosure. The enclosure will employ a hinged cover for
access to the fuses which will be interlocked with the operating handle to prevent opening the cover
when the switch is in the ON position. This interlock shall be constructed so that it can be released
with a standard electrician's tool for testing fuses without interrupting service. The units shall have
padlocking provisions in the OFF position and the operating handle position shall give positive
switch position indication, i.e. horizontal OFF, diagonal ON.
E.
Identification: Each switch shall be equipped with engraved plastic nameplates identifying its load.
Fusible switches shall also be provided with labels to identify rating of corresponding fuses.
F.
Branch circuits for feeders and power loads shall consist of switch and fuse of type, size, and rating
as indicated on the drawings.
1.
All main and branch shall be fully rated to match switchboard
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Installer must examine areas and conditions under which switchboards and components are to be
installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
Installer.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install switchboards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, with

recognized industry practices; complying with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA's Std PB 2.1,
and NECA's "Standard of Installation".
B.
Coordinate with other work including electrical cabling/wiring work, as necessary to interface
installation of switchboards with other work.
C.
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply
with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.
D.
Install fuses in switchboards, if any.

(116055)
Switchboards
26 24 13-2
3.3

A.
Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
B.
Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.
3.4
GROUNDING
A.
3.5
Provide equipment grounding connections for switchboards as indicated. Tighten connections to

comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective
ground. Provide ground bus of ampacity equal to at least 30% of main bus rating.
A.
Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's tightening

torque specifications.
B.
Prior to energization of switchboards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
C.
Prior to energization, check switchboards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short-circuits.
D.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize switchboards and demonstrate functioning in
END OF SECTION

(116055)
Switchboards
26 24 13-3
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes is indicated by
drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of panelboards and enclosures in this section include the following:

1.
2.
C.
Power-distribution panelboards.
Lighting and appliance type panelboards.
Refer to other Division-26 sections for cable/wire, connectors, and electrical raceway work required
in conjunction with panelboards and enclosures; not work of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide panelboard products of one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
General Electric Company.

Siemens.
Square D Company.
Cutler Hammer
PANELBOARDS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and auxiliary

components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard
materials; design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with
proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes,
or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for those
applications indicated.
B.
Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide circuit breaker type dead-front safety constructed power
distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities,
ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; with anti-turn compression type main lug connectors
approved for copper or aluminum conductors. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98%
conductivity, and with full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders
requiring neutral connections. Provide molded-case circuit-breakers for each branch circuit, with
toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multi-pole breakers are indicated, provide with
common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously Provide panelboards with
bare un-insulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Provide additional isolated
ground bar where required. Panelboard enclosures shall be not less than 8" deep. Provide
panelboards with UL markings indicating "suitable for use as service-entrance equipment". Label
each switch/breaker with the appropriate connected load and/or equipment identification. Labels
shall be a minimum 1 x 4 black plastic with engraved white letters.

(116055)
Panelboards
26 24 16-1
1.
2.
C.
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance
panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and
arrangements shown; with anti-turn compression type lug connectors approved for copper or
aluminum conductors; equip with copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bar, with bolt-on type
heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single-pole or multi-pole circuit- breakers, as indicated, with
toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Multi-pole breakers shall be provided with a common trip.
Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide bare un-insulated
grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Provide additional isolated ground bus where
required.
1.
2.
D.
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards shall be type:

240V
480V
Bolt-on
Bolt-on
a.
General Electric AQ
AD,AE
b.
Siemens
S1
S2
c.
Square D
NQOD
NF
d.
Cutler Hammer PRL1,PRL2
PLR2,PLR3
Breakers in 240 volt panelboards shall be fully rated and shall have an interrupting capacity of
not less than 10,000 amperes symmetrical or as indicated on the drawings, which ever is
greater.
Lighting and Appliance Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type
enclosures, minimum 20" wide and 5-3/4" deep, code-gage, minimum 16-gage thickness.
Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps,
and doors with flush metal locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike. Equip with
interior circuit-directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel
finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed or surface mounting as
indicated. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which
mate properly with panelboards to be enclosed, and are NEMA rated to suit the atmospheric
conditions of the equipment surroundings.
1.
E.
Breakers in 240 volt panelboards shall be fully rated and shall have an interrupting capacity of
not less than 22,000 amperes symmetrical or as indicated on the drawings, which ever is
greater.
Circuit Breaker Distribution Panelboards shall be:
a.
General Electric Spectra Series
b.
Siemens
S4, S5
c.
Square D
I-LINE
d.
Cutler Hammer Pow-R-Line
Furnish six spare keys for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
Panelboard Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide Door in Door construction with hinged covers.

Ground-fault protection units as indicated.
Shunt trip units as indicated.
Circuit breaker handle locking clips, for all breakers feeding fire alarm and security loads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Installer must examine areas and conditions under which panelboards and enclosures are to be
installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
Installer.

(116055)
Panelboards
26 24 16-2
3.2
INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS
A.
General: Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standard of
Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
requirements.
B.
Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work.
C.
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
Where
manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply
with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B or Manufacturer's torque
requirements when more stringent.
D.
Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and
mechanically secure.
E.
Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures.
F.
Provide panelboard circuit directory cards upon completion of installation work. Circuit directory
cards shall be arranged with even numbered circuits separated by group or card from odd
numbered circuits. All circuits, including spares and spaces, shall be labeled. All identification shall
be at a minimum typewritten. Hand lettering is not acceptable. Provide a description of the load
and its location for every circuit. The location must provide a written description and room number if
available. Example: A receptacle circuit in a Science Classroom could be Recept. Science Rm.
203.
G.
Provide four 3/4" empty conduits for future from each flush mounted panelboard to an accessible
space above the ceiling. Provide four " EMT conduit fittings with knock out closers in the top of
the panel for each surface mounted panelboard.
H.
All wiring within panelboards shall be arranged in a neat and organized manner.
3.3
GROUNDING
A.
3.4
Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboards as required by NEC and other
Division-26 sections. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL
Standard 486A and B to assure permanent and effective grounds.
A.
Prior to energizing circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's tightening torque
specifications.
B.
Prior to energizing panelboards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
C.
Prior to energizing, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short-circuits.
D.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in
END OF SECTION

(116055)
Panelboards
26 24 16-3
SECTION 26 28 13
FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Extent of fuse work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of fuses specified in this section include the following:

1.
2.
3.
Class RK1 time-delay

Class RK5 time-delay
Plug fuses
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements of this specification.

a.
2.2
The fuse model numbers listed below are for comparative value and are the part
numbers of the Bussman Company
FUSES
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average
time/current and peak let-through current characteristics indicated, which comply with
manufacturer's standard design, materials, and construction in accordance with published product
information, and with industry standards and configurations.
B.
Class RK1 Time-Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RK1 time-delay fuses rated 250V (Type LPN-RK)
for voltages under 250V and 600V (Type LPS-RK) for voltages 250-600 V, 60 Hz, with 200,000
RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for sizes 100 thru 600 amperes.
C.
Class RK5 Time-Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RK5 time-delay fuses rated 250V (Type FRN-R)
for voltages under 250V and 600V (Type FRS-R) for voltages 250-600 V, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS
symmetrical interrupting current rating for sizes 0.1 thru 90 amperes.
D.
Plug fuses shall be permitted only for single-pole fuse holders with switch units. Plug fuses shall be
dual-element Type S fuses.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF FUSES
A.
Install fuses as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with
recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply
with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of fuses.
B.
Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of
fuses with other work.

(116055)
Fuses
26 28 13-1
C.
Install fuses in fused switches.
D.
Short-circuit protection dual-element fuses installed in individual motor circuits with separate
overload protection shall be sized at 150% of motor nameplate current rating or the next standard
fuse size. Where excessive ambient temperature exist, high inertia motor loads or frequent "on-off"
cycling requires larger fuses, consult the electrical engineer. Use fuse reducers where fuse gaps
are larger than fuse dimension.
E.
All fuse sizes shall be coordinated with manufacturer's requirements for each unit of equipment to
be connected.
3.2

A.
3.3
Prior to energizing fusible devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short-circuits.
Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements.
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Maintenance Stock, Fuses: Except as provided in other sections and for types and ratings required,
furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than one unit
of each.
END OF SECTION

(116055)
Fuses
26 28 13-2
SECTION 26 28 16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Extent of circuit and motor disconnect switch work is indicated on drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of circuit and motor disconnect switches in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Equipment disconnects
Appliance disconnects
Motor-circuit disconnects
Wires/cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings required in connection with circuit and
motor disconnect work are specified in other Division-26 sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements on this specification and shall be of the
same manufacturer as the electrical distribution equipment specified in the other Division 26
sections.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
General-Duty Disconnect Switches:

For switches rated less than 100 amps provide
surface-mounted, general-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed switches, of types, sizes, and electrical
characteristics indicated; rated for system voltage, 60 Hz, with required number of poles and solid
neutral incorporating spring assisted, quick-make, quick-break switches. Equip with operating
handle which is integral part of enclosure base and whose operating position is easily recognizable,
and is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. Construct current carrying parts of
high-conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch contacts and positive pressure type
reinforced fuse clips where fusing is required. The enclosure shall be NEMA rated to suit the
atmospheric conditions of the equipment surroundings and of the manufacturer's standard finish.
When used as service disconnect, provide with UL markings indicating "suitable for use as service
equipment".
B.
Heavy-Duty Disconnect Switches:

For switches rated 100 amps or greater provide
surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed switches, of types, sizes and electrical
characteristics indicated; rated for system voltage 60 Hz, with required number of poles and solid
neutral incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches. Equip with operating handle which is
integral part of enclosure base and whose position is easily recognizable, and is padlockable in OFF
position; construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch
contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips where fusing is required. The enclosure
shall be NEMA rated to suit the atmospheric conditions of the equipment surroundings and of the
manufacturer's standard finish. When used as service disconnect, provide with UL markings
indicating "suitable for use as service equipment".
C.
Motor-Circuit Disconnect Switches Must Be HP Rated.

(116055)
Enclosed Switches
26 28 16-1
D.
Fuses: Provide fuses for disconnect switches, as recommended by switch manufacturer, of

classes, types, and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A.
Install circuit and motor disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in
accordance with recognized industry practices.
B.
Coordinate motor and circuit disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway work,
location of equipment, and as necessary for proper interface. Provide U-channel supports from
floor and/or structure where required to mount disconnects at free-standing equipment.
C.
Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers within
sight of controller position for motors greater than 1/8 HP.
3.2
GROUNDING
A.
3.3
Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to ensure a permanent and effective
ground as required by NEC and in "Grounding" section of Division-26.
A.
Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuitry and

demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning
units at project site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new
units and retest.
END OF SECTION

(116055)
Enclosed Switches
26 28 16-2

HVAC Complete Specifications

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

HVAC Complete Specifications

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

COLORADO SPRINGS,

650 First Street

FEI NO. 1160

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

Remove liquid spills promptly.

Waste Disposal: Burying waste materials on-site will not be permitted.

Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

STARTING AND ADJUSTING

Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.

Manufacturers Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to

PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

CORRECTION OF THE WORK

Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

Cutting and Patching

General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,

Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

Cutting and Patching

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

Cutting and Patching

This Section includes the following:

Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively

Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials

Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:

Clean salvaged items.

Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

Disposing of non-hazardous construction waste.

Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:

Certified by EPA-approved certification

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

Construction Waste Management And Disposal

Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

Construction Waste Management And Disposal

Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial

Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

D2 HVAC Upgrades Multiple Sites

Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment

Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as